GOLDSKE112
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE
GOLD RX/PX/CX/SD, GENERATION E
Applicable to program version 1.12 and newer versions
GOLD PX
GOLD RX
GOLD CX
GOLD SD
The document was originally written in Swedish.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
1
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Content
1. Safety Instructions.................... 3
6. Installation............................... 31
1.1 Safety Isolating Switch/Main Switch...........3
1.2 Risks ........................................................3
1.3 Safety Guards...........................................3
1.4 Glycol.......................................................3
6.1 Image Management................................31
6.2 Main Setup.............................................32
6.3 Filter Calibration......................................32
6.4 Functions................................................33
2. General...................................... 4
6.4.1 Airflow.......................................................33
6.4.1.1 Status...................................................33
6.4.1.2 Operation level......................................33
6.4.1.3 Regulation mode...................................34
6.4.1.4 Optimize...............................................35
6.4.1.5 Set point displacement..........................35
6.4.1.6 Unit......................................................35
6.4.1.7 Air adjustment......................................35
6.4.1.8 Outdoor air compensation.....................36
6.4.1.9 Booster diffusers...................................37
6.4.1.10 Automatic operation..............................37
6.4.2 Temperature................................................38
6.4.2.1 Status...................................................38
6.4.2.2 Settings.................................................38
6.4.2.3 Regulation mode...................................41
6.4.2.4 Set point displacement..........................41
6.4.2.5 Neutral zone.........................................41
6.4.2.6 External temperature sensors.................42
6.4.2.7 Regulation sequence.............................43
6.4.2.8 Min. exhaust air....................................44
6.4.2.9 Morning Boost......................................45
6.4.2.10 Heating Boost.....................................45
6.4.2.11 Cooling Boost.....................................46
6.4.2.12 Intermittent night heat........................47
6.4.2.13 Summer night cool..............................48
6.4.2.14 Down regulation (airflow/pressure)......49
6.4.3 Time and schedule......................................50
6.4.3.1 Time and date.......................................50
6.4.3.2 Schedule settings..................................50
6.4.3.3 Day schedule.........................................51
6.4.3.4 Exceptions schedule..............................51
6.4.3.5 Calendar 1 and 2..................................52
6.4.3.6 Prolonged operation..............................52
6.4.4 Energy monitoring......................................53
6.4.5 Filters..........................................................53
6.4.6 Software.....................................................53
6.4.7 Language....................................................53
6.4.8 Alarm settings.............................................54
6.4.8.1 Fire alarms.............................................54
6.4.8.2 External alarms......................................55
6.4.8.3 Temperature guard................................55
6.4.8.4 Temperature alarm limits.......................56
6.4.8.5 Service period.......................................56
6.4.8.6 Alarm priority........................................56
6.4.9 Log.............................................................57
6.4.9.1 Continuous log.....................................57
6.4.9.2 Log sender............................................57
6.4.10 Air handling unit ......................................58
6.4.10.1 Settings...............................................58
6.4.10.2 Fan status...........................................59
6.4.10.3 Operation time....................................59
6.4.10.4 Automatic functions............................59
6.4.11 Heat.........................................................60
6.4.11.1 Status ................................................60
6.4.11.2 Pre-heat..............................................60
6.4.11.3 Extra regulation sequence...................61
6.4.11.4 Reheat................................................62
6.4.11.5 Xzone.................................................62
6.4.11.6 Electric air heater.................................63
6.4.11.7 Season Heat........................................63
6.4.11.8 Automatic functions...............................63
6.4.12 Cool.........................................................64
6.4.12.1 Status ................................................64
6.4.12.2 Extra regulation sequence...................64
6.4.12.3 Cool....................................................65
6.4.12.4 Xzone.................................................66
6.4.12.5 COOL DX............................................66
6.4.12.6 Delay time...........................................67
6.4.12.7 Outdoor air limits................................67
6.4.12.8 Airflow limits.......................................67
6.4.13 Heat/Cool recovery....................................68
6.4.13.1 Status.................................................68
6.4.13.2 Carry over control...............................68
6.4.13.3 Defrost................................................69
6.4.13.4 Automatic functions............................70
6.4.14 SMART Link..............................................71
2.1 Range of Application.................................4
2.2 Mechanical Design....................................4
2.3 Control System.........................................4
2.4 Environm. Documentation.........................4
2.5 Type of Heat Exchanger.............................4
2.6 The Components of the Air
Handling Units................................................5
2.6.1 GOLD RX one-piece air handling unit with
rotary heat exchanger............................................5
2.6.2 GOLD PX one-piece air handling unit with
plate heat exchanger..............................................6
2.6.3 GOLD CX one-piece air handling unit with coil
heat exchangers.....................................................7
2.6.4 GOLD SD separate supply air and extract air
handling units, sizes 04-08.....................................8
2.6.5 GOLD SD separate supply air and extract air
handling units, size 12............................................9
2.6.6 GOLD SD separate supply air and extract
air handling units, Sizes 14-120, with coil heat
exchangers..........................................................10
3. Commissioning........................ 11
3.1 General...................................................11
3.2 Adjusting the Duct System and Air
Terminals......................................................12
3.2.1 Adjustment Sequence.................................12
3.2.2 Adjustment Procedure.................................12
3.3 To Adjust the Pressure Balance ................13
3.3.1 General.......................................................13
3.3.2. Ensure correct
direction of air leakage.........................................14
4. IQnavigator Hand-held
Terminal and Image
Management............................... 15
4.1 IQnavigator Hand-held Terminal..............15
4.1.1 General.......................................................15
4.1.2 How to use the micro terminal ....................16
4.1.3 Buttons.......................................................17
4.1.4 Indicator symbols........................................17
4.1.5 Keyboard....................................................18
4.2 Image Management................................19
4.2.1 Selection of language..................................20
4.2.2 Dashboard..................................................20
4.2.2.1 General.................................................20
4.2.2.2 To change the operating mode..............20
4.2.2.3 Alarm log..............................................20
4.2.2.4 Log diagram..........................................21
4.2.2.5 Flow chart.............................................21
5. User (local)............................... 22
5.1 Image Management................................22
5.2 Filter Calibration......................................23
5.3 Functions ...............................................24
5.3.1 Airflow.......................................................24
5.3.1.1 Status...................................................24
5.3.1.2 Operation level......................................24
5.3.1.3 Air adjustment......................................24
5.3.2 Temperature................................................25
5.3.2.1 Status...................................................25
5.3.2.2 Settings.................................................25
5.3.3 Time and schedule......................................27
5.3.3.1 Time and date.......................................27
5.3.3.3 Day schedule.........................................28
5.3.3.4 Exceptions schedule..............................28
5.3.3.5 Calendar 1 and 2..................................29
5.3.3.6 Prolonged operation..............................29
5.3.4 Energy monitoring......................................30
5.3.5 Filters..........................................................30
5.3.6 Software.....................................................30
5.3.7 Language....................................................30
2
www.swegon.com
6.4.15 Humidity...................................................72
6.4.15.1 Status.................................................72
6.4.15.2 Humidifying........................................72
6.4.15.3 Dehumidifying....................................73
6.4.15.4 Humidifier alarm.................................73
6.4.16 ReCO2.......................................................74
6.4.17 All Year Comfort.......................................75
6.4.18 MIRU Control............................................76
6.4.19 Inputs/Outputs..........................................77
6.4.20 Communication........................................78
6.4.20.1 External Port B.....................................78
6.4.20.2 Wireless LAN.......................................78
6.4.20.3 E-mail.................................................79
6.4.20.4 EIA-485...............................................79
6.4.20.5 Modbus TCP.......................................79
6.4.20.6 BACnet IP...........................................79
6.4.20.7 EXOline TCP........................................80
6.4.20.8 Operation level communication...........80
6.4.21 Base setting..............................................81
6.4.22. Users.......................................................81
6.4.23 Manual test...............................................82
6.4.24 IQnavigator (hand-held terminal)...............83
6.4.24.1 Connect to IQlogic..............................83
6.4.24.2 Backlight brightness............................83
6.4.24.3 Acoustics............................................83
7. Maintenance............................ 84
7.1 Filter Change..........................................84
7.1.1 Removing filters..........................................84
7.1.2 Installing new filters....................................84
7.2 Cleaning and Inspection..........................85
7.2.1 General.......................................................85
7.2.2 Filter spaces................................................85
7.2.3 Heat exchangers.........................................85
7.2.4 Fans and fan spaces....................................85
7.3 Performance Checks...............................85
8. Alarms and
Troubleshooting.......................... 86
8.1 General...................................................86
8.1.1 A and B alarms............................................86
8.1.2 Resetting the alarm.....................................86
8.1.3 Changing alarm settings..............................86
8.2 Alarm Descriptions with Factory Settings.87
9. Information Messages.......... 100
10. Technical Data..................... 101
10.1 Dimensions, GOLD RX one-piece air
handling unit with rotary heat exchanger....101
10.2 Dimensions, GOLD PX one-piece air
handling unit with plate heat exchanger......104
10.3 Dimensions, GOLD CX once-piece unit
with coil heat exchangers............................105
10.4 Dimensions, separate GOLD SD supply air
and extract air handling units......................107
10.5 Connection to wiring terminals...........110
10.6 Electrical data......................................111
10.6.1 Air handling unit.....................................111
10.6.2 Fans........................................................113
10.6.3 Electrical equipment cubicle....................113
10.6.4 Motor in rotary heat exchanger...............114
10.6.4.1 Standard rotor...................................114
10.6.4.2 Recosorptic rotor...............................114
10.6.5 Control inaccuracy..................................114
11. Appendices.......................... 115
11.1 Declaration of Conformity...................115
11.2 Commissioning Record........................116
11.3 Ecodesign data....................................159
11.4 Building Materials
Declaration.................................................160
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
1. Safety Instructions
All staff concerned must acquaint themselves with these instructions before beginning any work on the unit. Any damages to
the unit or parts of it due to improper handling or misuse by the
purchaser or the fitter cannot be considered subject to guarantee
if these instructions have not been followed correctly.
Warning
Only a qualified electrician or service personnel trained
by Swegon shall be permitted to modify the air handling
unit in conjunction with electrical installations or the
wiring of external functions.
1.1 Safety Isolating Switch/Main
Switch
On the size 04/05, 07/08, 11/12, 14/20 and 25/30 GOLD onepiece air handling units with rotary heat exchanger (RX) or plate
heat exchanger (PX), the safety isolating switch is externally
located on the junction hood.
On the size 35/40, 50/60, 70/80 and 100/120 GOLD one-piece
air handling units with rotary heat exchanger (RX), the safety
isolating switch is externally located on the centre section of the
unit.
On the size 35/40 GOLD one-piece air handling units with coil
heat exchangers (CX), the safety isolating switch is located
on the left side of the electric equipment cubicle in the centre
section of the unit. On the size 50/60, 70/80 and 100/120 air
handling units, the safety isolating switch is located in a plastic
enclosure in the centre section of the unit.
On the size 04-80 GOLD SD separate supply air and extract
air handling units, the safety isolating switch is located on the
inspection side by the fan section's inspection door. On the size
100/120 units, the safety isolating switch is located in a plastic
enclosure on the inspection side of the air handling unit.
Warning
The inspection doors on the filter/fan sections must not
be opened while the air handling unit is in operation.
Stop the unit when it is operating normally via the handheld terminal.
Wait until the fans have stopped rotating before opening
the inspection door.
The air pressure inside the filter/fan section is positive,
which means that the door can fly open.
Keep the key at a safe spot separate from the air handling unit.
1.3 Safety Guards
The cover of the electrical equipment cubicle, and when applicable the junction hood, serve as safety guards on the size 04/05
and 08 one-piece units with rotary heat exchanger (RX), as well
as on all the other variants (PX/CX/SD). On the size 12, 14/20,
25/30, 35/40, 50/60, 70/80 and 100/120 one-piece air handling
units with rotary heat exchanger (RX), the lockable door over the
electrical equipment cubicle, and if applicable the junction hood,
serve as safety guards.
Only a qualified electrician or trained service technicians shall be
allowed to remove the safety guards.
Warning
The power supply to the unit shall be isolated by switching off the safety isolating switch before removing the
safety guard.
When the air handling unit is operating, the safety guards
must always be mounted, all inspection doors must be
closed, and the junction hood on the top of the unit must
be mounted.
1.4 Glycol
The air handling unit should normally be started and stopped
from the hand-held terminal; not by switching the safety isolating switch on and off.
Glycol is used in the GOLD air handling units with coil
heat exchangers.
Always switch off the safety isolating switch before servicing the
unit if not otherwise specified in the pertinent instructions.
Warning
1.2 Risks
Warning
Before carrying out any work, make sure that the power
supply to the air handling unit has been switched off.
Risk areas with moving parts
Never pour glycol down a drain; collect it in a receptacle and leave it at a recycling centre, petrol station, etc.
Glycol is highly dangerous to consume and can cause
fatal poisoning or damage the kidneys. Contact a doctor!
Also avoid breathing glycol vapour in confined spaces. If
you get glycol in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with
water (for about 5 minutes). If glycol splashes on your
skin, wash with soap and water.
Moving parts are fan impellers, drive pulley for the rotary heat
exchanger, if fitted, and by-pass/shut-off damper of the plate
heat exchanger, if fitted.
The lockable inspection doors serve as protection from contact
with the fans and protection for the heat exchanger. If the ducts
are not firmly connected to the fan outlets, the outlets must be
firmly fitted with a safety guard (wire mesh screen).
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
3
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
2. General
2.1 Range of Application
The GOLD units are designed for use in comfort ventilation applications. Depending on the variant selected, GOLD units can be
utilised in buildings such as office buildings, schools, day nurseries, public buildings, shops, residential buildings, etc.
GOLD units equipped with plate/coil heat exchangers (PX/CX)
and separate supply air and extract air handling units (SD) can
also be used for the ventilation of moderately humid buildings;
however not where the humidity is continuously high, such as in
indoor swimming baths.
The separate GOLD supply air and extract air handling units (SD)
are designed for applications in which the supply air and extract
air flows need to be completely separated from one another or
where, due to limited available space, separate units for supply
air and extract air respectively are needed. They can also be used
individually if only one of the variants is needed.
In order to fully obtain all the benefits the GOLD system has to
offer, it is important to take the special characteristics of the air
handling units into account when planning them into the project, installing, commissioning and operating them.
The air handling unit in its basic version should be installed
indoors. The TBTA/TBTB accessory should be used if the air
handling units are installed outdoors. If the duct accessories are
installed outdoors, they must be housed in an insulated casing
(type TCxx).
Important!
Always read the safety instructions in Section 1 that
explain the risks involved in running the unit and designate who shall be permitted to operate and service the
unit, and carefully follow the installation instructions
provided in each paragraph.
The product identification plates are located on the inspection
side of the air handling unit and on a wall inside the fan section.
Refer to the particulars on the product identification plate when
you contact Swegon.
2.2 Mechanical Design
The GOLD is available in 9 physical sizes and for 18 airflow
ranges.
Its sheet steel exterior is painted in a beige colour. NCS S2005Y30R. Handles, decorative strips and the upper part of the junction hood are painted dark grey, NCS S 8502-B.The lower part
of the junction hood is painted black, NCS S 9000-N. The inner
skin material is aluminium-zinc coated sheet steel. Environmental
class C4. Intervening insulation: 50 mm thick mineral wool.
The size 11-30 GOLD units with plate heat exchanger (PX) or
rotary heat exchanger (RX) with air intake from above and the
separate size 04-08 supply air and extract air units (SD) as well as
the GOLD RX Top are equipped with pleated, class F7 filters. The
units in other variants/sizes have class F7 supply air and extract
air filters made of glass fibre.
The type RECOnomic rotary heat exchanger is variable speed
controlled and has a temperature efficiency of up to 85%.
The plate heat exchangers are as standard equipped with bypass
and shut-off dampers for variable and automatic control of the
heat exchanger’s efficiency on heat recovery.
4
www.swegon.com
The coil heat exchangers in the size 35-80 one-piece GOLD CX
air handling units are supplied completely mounted from the factory; including mounted pipework package with all the necessary
components. The system is normally filled with liquid, vented,
commissioned and performance-tested prior to delivery, but can
also be ordered in unfilled condition e.g. for housing improvement projects or if the application requires filling with another
mixture instead of 30 % ethylene glycol. Pipework packages
in unassembled form are available for the size 100/120 GOLD
CX one-piece units and for the size 12-120 GOLD SD separate
supply air and extract air handling units.
The supply air and extract air fans are of GOLD Wing+ type, an
axi-centrifugal fan with backward-curved blades. The fans are
direct-driven and have a motor controller for variable speed
control.
2.3 Control System
The IQlogic control system is microprocessor-based and is integrated into the air handling unit. It controls and regulates the
fans, heat exchanger, temperatures, airflows, in operation times
and a large number of internal and external functions as well as
alarms.
2.4 Environm. Documentation
For a complete Declaration of Construction Materials, see our
home page at www.swegon.com (applicable to Sweden only).
The air handling unit is designed in such a way that it can be
dismantled into its natural parts for scrapping. When the unit has
ended its useful product life, the services of an accredited recycling company should be utilised for disposal.
The recyclable weight of the GOLD is about 94% of its initial
weight.
Swegon AB is associated with the REPA Register, No.
5560778465.
Contact Swegon AB, Phone: +46 (0)512-322 00, if you have
any questions regarding the dismantling instructions or the air
handling unit’s impact on the environment.
2.5 Type of Heat Exchanger
The GOLD one-piece air handling unit is supplied with either a
rotary heat exchanger (RX), plate heat exchanger (PX) or coil heat
exchangers (CX). A coil heat exchanger is available as an option
for the separate supply air and extract air handling units (SD).
If any section, function, etc. deals only with one type of heat
exchanger, it is marked with an appropriate symbol as speified
below:
Rotary heat
exchanger (RX)
Coil heat exchangers
(CX, possibly SD)
Plate heat exchanger (PX)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
2.6 The Components of the Air Handling Units
2.6.1 GOLD RX one-piece air handling unit with rotary heat exchanger
The individual components are each specified below in a simplified and diagrammatical description.
8
9
3
4
5
6
7
10
2
11
1
12
13
Right-hand version
Fig. 1a
Outdoor air
Supply air
14
15
Extract air
16
17
18
19 20
GOLD 04-120: The air handling units can be ordered in the righthand version as shown in Fig. 1a or in the left-hand version as
shown in Fig. 1b.
GOLD 12-120: The air handling unit in Fig. 1a shows Fan
Arrangement 1. The unit can also be ordered according to Fan
Arrangement 2. The fans and filters are then vertically mirrorinverted.
In the left-hand version (Fig. 1b), the components marked with
an asterisk change function and designation (the components
are named according to whether they are for supply air or extract
air).
The arrangement of the components
and their designations
OUTDOOR AIR* (In left-hand version: Extract air)
EXHAUST AIR* (In left-hand version: Supply air)
Extract air fan* with motor and motor controller
Pressure sensor, extract air fan* (Position on function selector switch = 1)
5 Pressure sensor, supply air filter* (Position on function selector switch = 3)
6 Electrical equipm. cubicle with control unit
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
22
23
Exhaust air
Fig. 1b
1
2
3
4
21
Left-hand version
7 Pressue sensor, heat exchanger
(Position on function selector switch = B)
8 IQnavigator hand-held terminal
9 Extract air filter*
10 Commissioning plate (Left-hand unit version - by left-hand
filter section)
11 Temperature sensor, supply air (to be mounted in supply air
duct)
12 EXTRACT AIR* (In left-hand version: Outdoor air)
13 SUPPLY AIR* (In left-hand version: Exhaust air)
14 Supply air filter*
15 Temperature sensor, outdoor air*
16 Heat exchanger
17 Drive motor, heat exchanger
18 Rotation monitor sensor
19 Heat exchanger control unit
20 Pressure sensor, supply air fan* (Position on function selector switch = 2)
21 Pressure sensor, extract air filter* (Position on function selector switch = 4)
22 Temperature sensor, extract air*
23 Supply air fan* with motor and motor controller
www.swegon.com
5
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
2.6.2 GOLD PX one-piece air handling unit with plate heat exchanger
The individual components are each specified below in a simplified and diagrammatical description.
8
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
2
12
21
11
1
13
Right-hand version
Fig. 2a
Outdoor air
Supply air
14 15 16
Extract air
17
23
22
The air handling units are supplied in the right-hand or left-hand
version as shown in Fig. 2a and 2b. In the left-hand version (Fig.
2b), the components marked with an asterisk change function and designation (the components are named according to
whether the function is for supply air or extract air.).
The arrangement of the components
and their designations
1 EXHAUST AIR* (In left-hand version: Supply air)
2 OUTDOOR AIR* (In left-hand version: Extract air)
3 Pressure sensor, supply air filter* (Position on function selector switch = 3)
4 Supply air filter*
5 Temperature sensor, outdoor air*
6 Electrical equipm. cubicle with control unit
7 Valve actuators, shut-off and bypass dampers
8 Hand-held terminal
9 Temperature/relative humidity sensor, extract air*
10 Extract air filter*
11 Temperature sensor, supply air (to be mounted in supply air
duct)
www.swegon.com
19
20
Exhaust air
Fig 2b
6
18
Left-hand version
12
13
14
15
EXTRACT AIR* (In left-hand version: Outdoor air)
SUPPLY AIR* (In left-hand version: Exhaust air)
Extract air fan* with motor and motor controller
Pressure sensor, extract air fan* (Position on function selector switch = 1)
16 Sensor for freeze protection
17 Plate heat exchanger with bypass and shut-off damper
18 Pressure sensor, supply air fan* (Position on function selector
switch = 2)
19 Pressure sensor, extract air filter* (Position on function selector switch = 4)
20 Supply air fan* with motor and motor controller
21 Tappings for measuring pressure drop across the heat
exchanger.
22 Temperature/air density sensor, supply air.
23 Temperature/air density sensor, extract air.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
2.6.3 GOLD CX one-piece air handling unit with coil heat exchangers
The individual components are each specified below in a simplified and diagrammatical description.
7
5
3
4
25
6
8
2
11
23
1
10
13
12
Right-hand version, fan
arrangement 1
Fig. 3a
Outdoor air
Supply air
14
Extract air
15 16 17 18
19 24 20 21
22
Exhaust air
The air handling units can be ordered in the right-hand version as
shown in Fig. 3a or in the left-hand version as shown in Fig. 3b.
The air handling unit in Fig. 3a shows Fan Arrangement 1. The
unit can also be ordered according to Fan Arrangement 2. The
fans and filters are then vertically mirror-inverted.
In the left-hand version (Fig. 3b), the components marked with
an asterisk change function and designation (the components
are named according to whether the function is for supply air or
extract air).
The arrangement of the components
and their designations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
OUTDOOR AIR* (In left-hand version: Extract air)
EXHAUST AIR* (In left-hand version: Supply air)
Extract air fan* with motor and motor controller
Pressure sensor, extract air fan* (Position on function selector switch = 1)
Pressure sensor, supply air filter* (Position on function selector switch = 3)
Electrical equipm. cubicle with control unit
Hand-held terminal
Extract air filter*
Temperature sensor, supply air (to be mounted in supply air
duct)
Fig 3b
Left-hand version, fan
arrangement 1
11 EXTRACT AIR* (In left-hand version: Outdoor air)
12 SUPPLY AIR* (In left-hand version: Exhaust air)
13 Supply air filter*
14 Temperature sensor, outdoor air*
15 Coil heat exchanger with pipework package
16 Valve actuator
17 Temperature sensor for freeze protection
18 Circulation pump
19 Pressure sensor, supply air fan* (Position on function selector
switch = 2)
20 Pressure sensor, extract air filter* (Position on function selector switch = 4)
21 Supply air fan* with motor and motor controller
22 Temperature/relative humidity sensor, extract air*
23 Tappings for measuring pressure drop across the heat
exchanger.
24 Temperature/air density sensor, supply air.
25 Temperature/air density sensor, extract air.
GOLD CX, sizes 100/120: Pipework package including control box are supplied
in unmounted condition for floor or wall mounting (accessories).
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
7
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
2.6.4 GOLD SD separate supply air and extract air handling units, sizes 04-08
The individual components are each specified below in a simplified and diagrammatical description.
5
2
3
4
6
1
7
Fig. 4a
10
Outdoor air
9
8
Supply air
The air handling unit is supplied in the variant as shown in Fig.
4a. This variant can be positioned in several different ways as
shown in Fig. 4b.
Fig. 4b
The air handling unit is shown here as a supply air handling unit.
If the unit is used as an extract air handling unit, the components
marked with an asterisk change function and designation (the
components are named according to whether the function is for
supply air or extract air).
The arrangement of the components
and their designations
1 OUTDOOR AIR*
(In extract air handling units: Extract air)
2 Pressure sensor, supply air filter*, if applicable (Position on
function selector switch = 3) (In extract air handling units:
Pressure sensor, extract air filter)
3 Temperature sensor, outdoor air/air density sensor, supply
air*
(In extract air handling units: Temperature sensor, extract air/
air density sensor, exhaust air)
4 Pressure sensor, supply air fan* (Position on function selector
switch = 2)
(In extract air handling units: Pressure sensor, extract air fan)
8
www.swegon.com
5 Hand-held terminal
6 Temperature sensor, supply air (to be mounted in supply air
duct)
(Not used in extract air handling units)
7 SUPPLY AIR*
(In extract air handling units: Exhaust air)
8 Supply air fan* with motor and motor controller (In extract
air handling units: Extract air fan with motor and motor
controller)
9 Electrical equipm. cubicle with control unit
10 Supply air filter, if applicable*
(In extract air handling units: Extract air filter)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
2.6.5 GOLD SD separate supply air and extract air handling units, size 12
The individual components are each specified below in a simplified and diagrammatical description.
3
2
4
1
5
Fig. 5a
12
Outdoor air
11
10
9
8
7
6
Supply air
The air handling units can be ordered in the right-hand version
as shown in Fig. 5a or the left-hand version as shown in Fig. 5b.
The air handling units can also consist of filter and fan only or
fan only.
The air handling unit is shown here as a supply air handling unit.
If the unit is used as an extract air handling unit, the components
marked with an asterisk change function and designation (the
components are named according to whether the function is for
supply air or extract air).
The arrangement of the components
and their designations
1 OUTDOOR AIR*
(In extract air units: Extract air)
2 Temperature sensor, outdoor air/air density sensor, supply
air*
(In extract air handling units: Temperature sensor, extract air/
air density sensor, exhaust air)
3 Hand-held terminal
4 Temperature sensor, supply air (to be mounted in supply air
duct)
(Not used in extract air handling units)
5 SUPPLY AIR*
(In extract air handling units: Exhaust air)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Fig. 5b
6 Coil heat exchanger, supply air*, if applicable
(In extract air handling units: Coil heat exchanger, extract air
)
7 Temperature sensor, outdoor air*
(Only in units with coil heat exchanger)
(In extract air handling units: Temperature/relative humidity
sensor, extract air)
8 Supply air fan* with motor and motor controller
(In extract air handling units: Extract air fan with motor and
motor controller)
9 Pressure sensor, supply air fan* (Position on function selector
switch = 2)
(In extract air handling units: Pressure sensor, extract air fan)
10 Electrical equipm. cubicle with control unit
11 Pressure sensor, supply air filter*, if applicable (Position on
function selecor switch = 3) (In extract air handling units:
Pressure sensor, extract air filter)
12 Supply air filter*, if applicable
(In extract air handling units: Extract air filter)
www.swegon.com
9
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
2.6.6 GOLD SD separate supply air and extract air handling units, Sizes 14-120,
with coil heat exchangers
The individual components are each specified below in a simplified and diagrammatical description.
3
2
4
1
5
Fig. 6a
12
Outdoor air
11 10
9
7
6
Supply air
The air handling units can be ordered in the right-hand version
as shown in Fig. 6a or the left-hand version as shown in Fig. 6b.
The air handling units can also consist of filter and fan only or
fan only.
The air handling unit is shown here as a supply air handling unit.
If the unit is used as an extract air handling unit, the components
marked with an asterisk change function and designation (the
components are named according to whether the function is for
supply air or extract air).
The arrangement of the components
and their designations
1 OUTDOOR AIR*
(In extract air handling units: Extract air)
2 Temperature sensor, outdoor air/air density sensor, supply
air*
(In extract air handling units: Temperature sensor, extract air/
air density sensor, exhaust air)
3 Hand-held terminal
4 Temperature sensor, supply air (to be mounted in supply air
duct)
(Not used in extract air handling units)
5 SUPPLY AIR*
(In extract air handling units: Exhaust air)
10
8
www.swegon.com
Fig. 6b
6 Supply air fan* with motor and motor controller
(In extract air handling units: Extract air fan with motor and
motor controller)
7 Pressure sensor, supply air fan* (Position on function selector
switch = 2)
(In extract air handling units: Pressure sensor, extract air fan)
8 Electrical equipm. cubicle with control unit
9 Coil heat exchanger, supply air*, if applicable
(In extract air handling units: Coil heat exchanger, extract air
)
10 Temperature sensor, outdoor air*
(Only in units with coil heat exchanger)
(In extract air handling units: Temperature/relative humidity
sensor, extract air)
11 Pressure sensor, supply air filter* (Position on function selector switch = 3)
(In extract air units: Pressure sensor, extract air filter)
12 Supply air filter*, if applicable
(In extract air handling units: Extract air filter)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
3. Commissioning
3.1 General
Commissioning sequence:
1. Check that there are no foreign objects inside the unit, duct
system or functional sections.
5. The air handling unit has a factory setting that makes it ready
to operate. See Section 11.2 Commissioning Report.
2. Check that rotary heat exchanger rotor (only GOLD RX) rotates
easily. On sizes 50-120, the rotary heat exchanger must be
angled slightly towards the filter, see drawing below.
However, in many cases, these settings need to be adjusted to
suit the current installation.
If necessary, enter the fan position setting (inspection side),
see Section 6.4.10.
Program the timer (switch clock), operating mode, temperatures, airflows and functions according to the procedures in
Sections 4-15.
Select whether the airflow unit of measurement shall be l/s,
m3/s, m3/h or cfm.
Fill out the Commissioning Record and save it in the document pocket of the air handling unit.
In some cases it might be necessary to adjust the P-band
and the I-time if the heating regulation system is oscillating
or operates sluggishly. This requires entering a special code.
Contact your Swegon representative.
If the inclination needs adjusting, see special instructions for
adjusting the inclination of the rotary heat exchanger (04-80)
or the installation instructions for the GOLD (120).
L
≈ 0,5xL
6. Activate, if needed, manual or auto operation (Dashboard) or
lock the speed of the fans (AIRFLOW ADJUSTMENT image).
Adjust the airflow in the duct system and air terminals as
described in Section 3.2.
≈ 0,5xL
L
GOLD RX,, sizes 50-120: The illustration shows the factory-preset rotor inclination for Fan Arrangement 1. The inclination must
always be toward the filter, which means that the inclination for
Fan Arrangement 2 is in the other direction.
7. Check and adjust, if required, the pressure balance in the air
handling unit as described in Section 3.3.
8. Finish off with a filter calibration as described in Section 6.3.
3. Turn the safety isolating switch to the ON position (I).
4. Select the appropriate language, if you have not already done
so. See Section 5.3.7 or 6.4.7.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
11
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
3.2 Adjusting the Duct System
and Air Terminals
In order to prevent the fans from consuming more power than
necessary, it is important to keep the pressure drop in the system
at the lowest possible level. It is also important that duct systems
and air terminals are correctly commissioned to provide the
comfort expected.
When commissioning air terminals and the duct systems for the
GOLD, it is appropriate to follow the proportionality method.
This means that the ratio between the airflows in branch ducts
remains constant even if you change the airflow in the main
ducts. The same ratio applies to the air terminals in the installation.
When commissioning the duct system there is provision for
locking the speed of the fans in the air handling unit to provide a
specific preset flow rate, see Section 5.3.1.3.
3.2.1 Adjustment Sequence
3. Start adjusting the main duct that has the highest quotient
and the branch duct in the main duct that has the highest
quotient. Starting from this point enables you to then "press"
the air in front of you toward the sections of the system that
have the least air.
4. Adjust the last air terminal on the duct branch so that it will
have the same quotient as the index air terminal. This air
terminal becomes the REFERENCE AIR TERMINAL. Often it is
the last air device on the branch that has the lowest quotient
and this air terminal should be open. In this case, the index
air terminal and the reference air terminal will be one and the
same.
5. Throttle the other air terminals in the branch to the same
quotient as the reference device.
N.B.! The quotient in the reference terminal will change every
time another air terminal is throttled, so in practice the quotient for the reference air terminal can be set slightly higher.
The reference device must be measured in between each air
terminal throttled.
The system should be adjusted in the following order:
6. Go to the branch that had the next highest quotient and
adjust the air terminals there, etc.
1. Adjust of the air terminals in each branch duct.
2. Adjust the branch ducts.
3. Adjust the main ducts.
3.2.2 Adjustment Procedure
1. Set all the air terminals and dampers to the fully open position.
2. Calculate the quotient between the airflow reading and the
design airflow of all the air terminals, branch ducts and main
ducts. The air terminal in every branch that has the lowest
quotient should be fully open. Use this air terminal as an
INDEX AIR TERMINAL. The same applies to branch dampers
and main dampers.
N.B.! All branch dampers should be fully open until all air
terminals have been adjusted.
7. Throttle the branch damper that had the highest quotient to
the same quotient as the branch that had the lowest quotient.
N.B.! Keep in mind that the index damper changes quotient;
proceed as described in item 5.
8. When all branches have been commissioned, throttle the main
dampers in the same manner.
See also Adjustment example below.
When you’ve finished commissioning, one air terminal in
every branch, one branch damper and one main damper
should consequently be fully open.
Example on how to make an adjustment
– Start adjusting duct branch B, since this one has the highest quotient.
– The last air device, B3, has the lowest quotient and should
be fully open.
Adjust the other air devices, B1 and B2, so that these will
have the same quotientas air device B3 (see item 5 above).
– Now adjust the air devices in branch duct C. Air device
C4 should be fully open; throttle the others to the same
quotient.
– Adjust the air devices in branch duct A. The index air
device here is air device A3, which means that you first
throttle air device A4 (the reference device) to device A3:s
quotient. Then adjust the others to the same quotient as air
device A4.
– Throttle branch damper B to the same quotient as branch
damper A, throttle branch damper C to the same quotient
as branch damper A.
Check that all dampers have the same quotient.
qp = design airflow (l/s)
When commissioning has been completed, 3 air devices and
one branch damper should stand fully open to obtain the
lowest possible pressure in the system.
qm = flow reading (l/s)
12
www.swegon.com
qm
K (Quotient) =
qp
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
3.3 To Adjust the
Pressure Balance
3.3.1 General
There should be a certain degree of negative pressure in the
extract air section so that the direction of air leakage through the
heat exchanger and the function of the purging sector will be
correct. This ensures that extract air will not be transferred to the
supply air.
Applicable to air handling units with rotary heat
exchanger only.
Commissioning plates
GOLD RX
Air intake viewed from the side
Sizes 04 – 12, 1 – 2 plates Sizes 14 – 120, 1 – 5 plates
The pressure balance in the unit should be adjusted when the
ventilation system has been fully installed and the airflows
discharged from all the air diffusers and registers have been
adjusted, and when the supply air and extract airflows are as
they should be while the air handling unit is operating normally.
Air intake viewed from above
Sizes 14 – 30, 2 plates
Secure the commissioning plates to the
ceiling with selftapping screws from
inside the AHU.
CLOSE
OPEN
GOLD RX Top
Left-hand versione
Sizes 04-12, 1 plate
Adjust the pressure
balance by blanking
off the holes in the
commissioning plate
using the plastic plugs
supplied with it (reach
up and insert plastic
plug through the
rectangular hole in the
commissioning plate).
CLOSE
(Insert one or more
commissioning plates)
OPEN
(Remove commissioning plates)
Right-hand version
Sizes 04-08, 1 plate
Size 11/12, 1 plate
EXTRACT AIR
EXTRACT
AIR
EXTRACT
AIR
Inspection side
Fixing screw
Fixing screw(s)
Adjustment
plate
For the sake of clarity, the image shows
the air handling unit
without end panel. All
work must however
be carried out from
the inspection side.
Fixing screw(s)
Commissioning plate
Hook the commissioning plate in the rear edge of the unit to secure it
in position. Unfold the commissioning plate at its front edge and lock
the commissioning plate in position with the fixing screw.
Adjustment
plate
Two commissioning plates are supplied together with the GOLD RX Top.
Which commissioning plate is to be mounted is determined by whether the air handling unit is a left-hand or right-hand version unit.
Install the correct commissioning plate at the appropriate place inside the unit; scrap the other plate. See illustration above.
Remove the mounting screw(s) and place the commissioning plate in the grooves provided for accommodating it. Refit the mounting
screw(s) and tighten it/them. See illustration above.
Adjust the pressure balance by blanking off the holes in the commissioning plate using the plastic plugs supplied with it.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
13
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
3.3.2. Ensure correct
direction of air leakage
The commissioning plates fitted in the extract air inlet are used
for adjusting the pressure balance in the unit. The commissioning plates are supplied separately and should be fitted in the unit
by the fitter when he connects the extract air ducting to the air
handling unit. See the illustrations on the following pages.
Connect a pressure gauge to the pressure measurement tappings
of the air handling unit. The unit has four pressure measurement
tappings. The two tappings closest to the extract air duct should
be used. The blue pressure measurement tapping is used for
measuring the negative pressure in the extract air section and the
white pressure measurement tapping is used for measuring the
negative pressure in the supply air section.
On the size 04-08 units, the pressure measurement tappings are
in the electrical equipment cubicle/electrical distribution box and
on the size 11-120 units they are inside in the centre section of
the unit. When you combine the GOLD RX Top 04-12 with the
COOL DX Top, note that the pressure measurement tappings
are located inside the centre section of the air handling unit. See
illustration to the right.
Pressure measurement tappings,
direction of air leakage
(Right-hand air handlling unit)
GOLD 04-08
- (blue)
+ (white)
EXTRACT AIR
GOLD 11-80
Note that both pressure measurement tappings are used for
measuring negative pressure.
MEASURED VALUES
– (blue)
The negative pressure in the extract air section should be higher
or the same as the negative pressure in the supply air section.
EXTRACT
AIR
+ (white)
If the negative pressure in the extract air section is the same or
up to 20 Pa greater than the negative pressure in the supply air
section, then you’ve finished this adjustment.
Deviations
If the negative pressure in the extract air section is less than that
in the supply air section, the damper setting must be adjusted as
follows:
1. Stop the air handling unit, open the inspection door to access
the extract air filter.
GOLD RX Top/GOLD RX with air intake from above: Blank off
an appropriate number of holes in the commissioning plate
using the plastic plugs supplied.
GOLD RX with air intake from the side: Slightly push the
commissioning plates forward (close them) in the extract air
intake.
For full face connection (duct accessory in insulated casing):
If the commissioning plate(s) is/are completely closed and
the sub-atmospheric pressure in the extract air section is still
less than in the supply air section, blank off an appropriate
number of holes in the commissioning plate using the plastic
plugs supplied.
GOLD 100/120
EXTRACT
AIR
– (blue)
+ (white)
3. Close the inspection door and restart the unit.
4. Measure the pressures.
Repeat this procedure until the negative pressure in the
extract air section is just as high or up to 20 Pa higher
than the negative pressure in the supply air section (0–20
Pa).
5. If the negative pressure in the extract air section is higher
than 20 Pa compared with the supply air section, although
the commissioning plates are completely open, the leakage
and purging air flow will be more than necessary, and this will
cause the extract air fan to consume more power.
14
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
4. IQnavigator Hand-held
Terminal and Image Management
4.1 IQnavigator Hand-held Terminal
4.1.1 General
The hand-held terminal consists of a 7” capacitive touch screen
with a 3 metre long cable for connection to the air handling
unit's control circuit card by means of a quick-fit connector.
IQnavigator can be used outdoors, but it must be kept at a
weatherproof place.
The hand-held terminal is switched on/off with an on/off button
located on the top side of the terminal. If the hand-held terminal
is not used for 45 minutes, it switches over to the sleep mode.
See the illustrations below for particulars of the connections,
buttons and LEDs.
Data:
Operating temperature:
Height from which it can be
dropped without damage:
-20 - + 50C
1 metre
On/off button:
Alarm indicating LED
Light sensor
Flashes red in event of
an alarm
In operation indicating LED
Green steady glow while unit is operating
When the touch screen is at rest or is switched off:
Brief press of the On/Off button = touch screen awakens or starts up
When the touch screen is on:
Brief press of the On/Off button = touch screen at rest
Long press of the On/Off button = Question, "Do you want to power
off IQnavigator?" is displayed, press OK, touch screen switches off
N.B.! When you disconnect the cable
from IQnavigator, squeeze the connector so that you press in the catch
inside the connector (hidden under the
protective rubber covering).
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
SD card
for
future
function
USB connection for
future function
RJ12 contact
for future
function
Headphone
connection
For future
function
Connection for external power supply
(accessory)
RJ45 connection for power and communication cable for IQnavigator (PoE)
or connection to the network (requires
a TBLZ-1-70 net adapter accessory)
www.swegon.com
15
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
4.1.2 How to use the micro terminal
When a light grey surface is displayed to the right and/or to the
left on the touch screen and an image indication is displayed at
the bottom edge, this indicates that it is possible to navigate to
one side or both sides.
Dashboard
Timer, low speed
Stop
Alarm log
Flow chart
Image indication
(In this case the screen indicates that it is
possible to navigate to both sides)
Light grey
surface
When a scroll bar is displayed on the touch screen, the screen's
content can be scrolled upward or downward.
Airflow
Status
Status
Operation level
Supply air
Regulation mode
Extract air
Boost
Supply air duct
Unit
Supply air duct, set point
Air adjustment
Outdoor air
compensation
Extract air duct
Extract air duct, set point
Booster diffusers
Scroll bar
Press the object you want to open or highlight.
Airflow
FORCING
Status
Operation level
Supply air
Regulation mode
Extract air
Boost
UNIT
Unit
Unit
Air adjustments
AIRFLOW ADJUSTMENTS
Outdoor air compensation
Required time
h
Booster diffusers
Remaining time
When the On/Off button is displayed on the touch screen, drag
or point to it so that it shows the required position.
min.
Airflow
FORCING
Status
Operation level
Supply air
Regulation mode
Extract air
Boost
Unit
Air adjustments
Outdoor air
compensation
UNIT
Unit
AIRFLOW ADJUSTMENTS
Required time
h
Booster diffusers
Remaining time
16
www.swegon.com
min.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
4.1.3 Buttons
Buttons along the upper edge of the touch screen have the following functions:
Dashboard
Timer, low speed
Press this button to log out.
Stop
Press this button to go one step upward in the
image tree.
Alarm log
Press this button to close a window and to return
to a previously displayed object.
Log graph
Flow chart
Press this button to return to the dashboard.
Help texts for the current view.
4.1.4 Indicator symbols
Hand-held terminal connected.
Dashboard
Timer, low speed
Stop
The hand-held terminal has no connection.
Not logged on
Logged on user (local)
Alarm log
Log graph
Flow chart
Logged on installation
Indicates that the web page is active
Indicates that some communication protocol is
activated
The current time/date, type of air handling unit and
the name of the plant are displayed along the upper
edge of the touch screen. See also Section 6.4.10.1.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
17
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
4.1.5 Keyboard
The value that can be changed is highlighted in grey. A keyboard
is displayed at the lower edge of the touch screen when you log
on and enter settings.
User selection
A value you want to change can be highlighted by pressing it on
the touch screen.
Then enter the required value and save it by pressing on the
Done button.
The function of the buttons:
Enter PIN code
Decimal point
Deletes previous character
Cancel
Done
Decreases the highlighted value
Increases the highlighted value
Minus sign.
Used for writing negative values.
Unspecified value.
Used for the time and schedule function.
18
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
4.2 Image Management
Select required language (displayed when
starting for first time). See Section 4.2.1.
Start-up image
Select the required authorization level.
Profile selection
local (user).See Section 5.
No access code is required.
installation. See Section 6.
Code (=1111) is required for access to this image group
service.
Code and special training are required for access to this image
group.
Dashboard. See Section 4.2.2.
Dashboard
N.B.! The appearance of the image
varies depending on the type of air handling unit and functions selected.
Timer, low speed
Stop
Alarm log
Log graph
Flow chart
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
19
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
4.2.1 Selection of language
When the air handling unit starts up for the first time, a language selection image is displayed. Select required language and
press OK.
If you want to change to a different language later on – or
if you’ve selected the wrong language – you can change the
language under Functions in the hand-held terminal. See Section
5.3.7.
4.2.2 Dashboard
4.2.2.1 General
The dashboard is normally displayed if no other image has been
selected.
Dashboard
Timer, low speed
Stop
The touch screen switches to the sleep mode after 45 minutes.
To leave the sleep mode, press on the touchscreen's On/Off
button.
Alarm log
The content in the flow chart changes depending on the selected
type of air handling unit and other functions that affect the
relevant operating conditions.
Log graph
Flow chart
4.2.2.2 To change the operating mode
You can start and stop the air handling unit or change over to
manual or automatic operation from the dashboard.
The air handling unit should normally be started and
stopped from the hand-held terminal; not by switching
the safety isolating switch on and off.
Shows current
operation status
Shows number of
current alarms
4.2.2.3 Alarm log
Active alarms, pending alarms and alarm history (50 latest) can
be viewed under Alarm log. See also Section 8.
20
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
4.2.2.4 Log diagram
An SD card must be fitted into the air handling unit's control
circuit card (installed from the factory) in order to make this function possible. Does not apply to the real time log.
Under "Log diagram", a number of signals can be read in diagram form. Up to four signals can be freely selected and read in
the list under the "Signals" button. The log diagram's time interval can be selected as follows: 4 hours, day, week, month or year.
Log graph
Signals
Position
4 hours
Day
Week
Month
Year
Summation,
outdoor air
regulation
Outdoor air
Add signal
In the list under the "Signals" button, you can also choose to
mark one of the signals to display it with a thicker line in the log
diagram. This is done by tapping the desired coloured square.
The program automatically adjusts the resolution of the signals.
The means that the program adapts the amplitude of the signal
to the height of the diagram within the selected time interval.
The Log diagram can be selected in two types: History or Real
time, under the "Mode" button.
The cursor of the diagram is fixed and the time line can be
moved by scrolling to the right or to the left.
Mode button
Signals button
Cursor
Time intervals
Example of coloured square
4.2.2.5 Flow chart
The flow chart can be displayed in full screen by tapping the
Flow chart heading.
Setting the Edit button to ON makes the flow chart editable.
Flow chart
Edit
The positions of all the components marked with a green frame
are interchangeable, for example the mutual order between the
air heater and the air cooler. Place your finger on the relevant
component, drag it to the desired position and lift your finger.
The circulation pump of the air heater can be hidden by clicking
on the air heater symbol.
The grey-marked components with green frame are inactive.
These can be activated by tapping the desired component.
Edit button
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Component with
green frame
www.swegon.com
21
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
5. User (local)
5.1 Image Management
If the touch screen is at rest, press the hand-held terminal's On/
Off button.
Profile selection. Press on local
(user). Does not require entering a code
Profile selection
Guides
Functions
Dashboard
Timer, low speed
Filter
calibration
Stop
Airflow
Alarm log
Language
Log graph
Filter calibration.
Se avsnitt 5.2
22
www.swegon.com
Temperature
Time and
schedule
Energy
monitoring
Filters
Software
Flow chart
Dashboard.
Se avsnitt 4.2.2
Functions.
See Section 5.3
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
5.2 Filter Calibration
All the filters should be calibrated when the fans are started up
for the first time and when the duct system, air terminals and
commissioning plates, if required, have been installed and commissioned.
After that every time filters are replaced. Calibration should then
be activated for the filter or filters that are new. Relevant filters
are the Supply air prefilter, Extract air pre-filter, Supply air AHU
filter, Extract air AHU filter, SA and EA AHU filter and Supply air
end filter.
When filter calibration is activated, the AHU fans operate at
preset max. speed (depending on the functionality selected) for
about 3 minutes.
After the filters have been calibrated, a pressure rise of up to 100
Pa is permissible (as the filters arrest impurities) after which an
alarm indicating fouled filter is initiated. The alarm limit can be
changed under Installation, Functions, Filters.
The filter function must be activated (see Section 6.4.5) in order
to make it possible to enable filter calibration and alarm functions of the end filter and pre-filter in GOLD SD supply air and
extract air handling units.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Filter
calibration
Filter calibration
CALIBRATION MODE
Supply air pre-filter
Supply air AHU filter
Extract air pre-filter
Extract air AHU filter
SA and EA pre-filter
SA and EA AHU filter
Supply air end filter
Progress
Start
www.swegon.com
23
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
5.3 Functions
5.3.1 Airflow
See also Section 6.4.1 in which the functions for airflow
described in detail.
Airflow
5.3.1.1 Status
All the relevant values can be read here. Used for performance
checks.
Status
5.3.1.2 Operation level
Operation level
The functions selected (under Installation) and the min. and max.
airflows of each AHU size (see the table below) determine which
values can be set.
Values for airflow (l/s, m3/s, m3/h, cfm), pressure (Pa) or input
signal strength (%) can be preset depending on the function
selected.
Air adjustment
Low speed
Should always be preset. The value for low speed cannot be
higher than the value for high speed. Low speed can be set to 0,
which means that the AHU is idle.
High Speed
Should always be preset. The value or pressure for high speed
cannot be lower than the value for low speed.
Min. /Max. speed
Used for the demand control function (the previous section also
applies to max. speed). Preset the lowest and highest permissible
flows for each fan. This means that the fans will not operate
outside these limits, regardless the load.
Max. speed
5.3.1.3 Air adjustment
Should always be preset. Used mainly for filter calibration. While
filter calibration is in progress, the max. speed setting should be
as high as the ventilation system permits without causing any
breakdown. Also used for the pressure regulation, forcing, Heating Boost and Cooling Boost functions. The value for max speed
cannot be lower than the value for high speed.
The speed of the fans can be locked for up to 72 hours. When
the function is activated, the speed is locked at the current speed
of operation. This is practical when making airflow adjustments
in the duct system and air terminals. The desired period is preset,
but can be interrupted earlier by selecting Stop or by changing
the time setting to 0.
Min./Max. flows
AIRFLOW
MIN. FLOW FOR
AIRFLOW REG.,
ALL VARIANTS2
MAX. FLOW, ONE-PIECE
AHU
ROTARY HEAT EXCH.
(RX)
MAX. FLOW,
ONE-PIECE AHU
PLATE H. EXCH.
(PX)
MAX. FLOW, ONE-PIECE
AHU
COIL H. EXCH. (CX)
m3/h
m3/s
MAX. FLOW, SA AND
EA AHU’S (SD)
SMALLEST
STEP
SIZE
m3/h 1
m3/s
m3/h
m3/s
m3/h
m3/s
m3/h
m3/s
m3/h
m3/s
GOLD 04
288
0,08
1620
0,45
1620
0,45
2160
0,6
25
0,01
GOLD 05
288
0,08
2340
0,65
2340
0,65
2880
0,8
25
0,01
GOLD 07
288
0,08
2700
0,75
2700
0,75
2880
0,8
25
0,01
GOLD 08
720
0,20
3600
1,00
3600
1,00
4320
1,2
25
0,01
GOLD 11
720
0,20
3960
1,10
3960
1,10
4320
1,2
25
0,01
GOLD 12
720
0,20
5040
1,40
5040
1,40
6480
1,8
25
0,01
GOLD 14
720
0,20
5940
1,65
5940
1,65
6480
1,8
25
0,01
GOLD 20
1080
0,30
7560
2,10
7560
2,10
10080
2,8
25
0,01
GOLD 25
1080
0,30
9000
2,50
9000
2,50
10080
2,8
25
0,01
GOLD 30
1800
0,50
11520
3,20
11520
3,20
14400
4,0
25
0,01
GOLD 35
1800
0,50
14040
3,90
14040
3,90
14400
4,0
100
0,05
GOLD 40
2700
0,75
14040/180003
3,90/5,003
14040/180003
3,90/5,003
18000/216003
5,0/6,03
100
0,05
GOLD 50
2160
0,6
18000
5,00
18000
5,00
20160
5,6
100
0,05
GOLD 60
3600
1,00
23400
6,50
23400
6,50
28800
8,0
100
0,05
GOLD 70
3600
1,00
27000
7,50
27000
7,50
28800
8,0
100
0,05
GOLD 80
5400
1,50
34200
9,50
34200
9,50
43200
12,0
100
0,05
GOLD 100
5400
1,50
39600
11,0
39600
11,0
43200
12,0
100
0,05
GOLD 120
9000
2,50
50400
14,0
50400
14,0
64800
18,0
100
0,05
1) When adjusting the flow, round off the value to the nearest settable step.
2) If pressure regulation is used, the airflow can be regulated to zero, however this presupposes a certain static
pressure drop in the ducting (approx. 50 Pa).
3) Cap. variant 1/cap.variant 2
24
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
5.3.2 Temperature
Basic functions can be set under Installation and the
values can be read and set under User (local).
Therefore see also Section 6.4.2 in which the functions
for temperature are described in detail.
N.B.! If the entry of new temperature settings involve large
changes, you should first stop the AHU before you enter the new
settings.
Specific temperatures, such as set points, should be specified in
°C, whereas displacements, deviations and differentials should
be specified in K (Kelvin).
If only GOLD SD supply air handling units are installed, they
require an external room sensor for ERS, ORE and extract air
regulation.
Temperature
Status
Settings
5.3.2.1 Status
All the relevant values can be read here. Used for performance
checks.
ERS Regulation 1
The control unit regulates the ratio between the supply air and
extract air temperature according to a factory-preset curve.
Settings (see also diagram to the right):
Value
Extract related supply air-1 step
Extract related supply air-1 diff
Extract related supply air-1
breakpoint
(refers to extract air temperature)
Setting
range
1-4
1-7 K
12-26 °C
Factory
setting
2
3K
22 °C
ERS Regulation 2
An individually adjusted curve regulates the ratio between the
supply air and the extract air temperature. The curve has four
adjustable breakpoints.
Supply air temperature set point °C
ERS Regulation 1, example
5.3.2.2 Settings
p1
Breakpoint
S
ER
1
di
Step 3
Step 4
10
12
15
20
25
Extract air temperature °C
Setting
range
Factory
setting
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
15 °C
20 °C
22 °C
22 °C
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
20 °C
18 °C
14 °C
12 °C
ERS Regulation 2, example
22
Y = Supply air temperature set point °C
Extract air temperature
Extract related supply air-2 X1
Extract related supply air-2 X2
Extract related supply air-2 X3
Extract related supply air-2 X4
Supply air temperature set point
Extract related supply air-2 Y1
Extract related supply air-2 Y2
Extract related supply air-2 Y3
Extract related supply air-2 Y4
Step 2
.
ff
15
Settings (see also diagram to the right):
Value
Ste
20
20
1
2
15
3
4
10
9
12
15
20
25
27
X = Extract air temperature °C
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
25
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Supply air regulation
Supply air regulation involves maintaining a constant supply air
temperature without consideration to the load in the premises.
Settings:
Value
Setting
range
0-40 °C
Supply air (temp. set point)
Factory
setting
21 °C
Extract air regulation
Extract air regulation involves maintaining a constant temperature in the extract air duct (the premises), by regulating the
supply air temperature.
Settings:
Extract air (temp. set point)
Supply air, min.
Supply air, max.
Factory
setting
21 °C
15 °C
28 °C
ORS regulation
An individually adjusted curve regulates the ratio between the
outdoor air and the supply air temperature. The curve has four
adjustable breakpoints.
Settings (see also diagram to the right):
Value
Setting
range
Outdoor air temperature
Outdoor related supply air X1
Outdoor related supply air X2
Outdoor related supply air X3
Outdoor related supply air X4
Supply air temperature set point
Outdoor related supply air Y1
Outdoor related supply air Y2
Outdoor related supply air Y3
Outdoor related supply air Y4
Factory
setting
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-20 °C
-10 °C
10 °C
20 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
21.5 °C
21.5 °C
21.5 °C
21.5 °C
ORE regulation
An individually adjusted curve regulates the ratio between the
outdoor air and the extract air temperature. The curve has four
adjustable breakpoints.
Settings (see also diagram to the right):
Value
Outdoor air temperature
Outdoor related extract air X1
Outdoor related extract air X2
Outdoor related extract air X3
Outdoor related extract air X4
Extract air temperature set point
Outdoor related extract air Y1
Outdoor related extract air Y2
Outdoor related extract air Y3
Outdoor related extract air Y4
26
www.swegon.com
Setting
range
Factory
setting
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-20 °C
-10 °C
10 °C
20 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
21.5 °C
21.5 °C
21,5 °C
21,5 °C
ORS regulation, example
Y = Supply air temperature set point °C
Setting
range
0-40 °C
0-20 °C
16-50 °C
25
2
20
3
4
1
15
-30
-20
-10
0
+10
+20
+30
X = Outdoor air temperature °C
ORE regulation, example
Y = Extract air temperature set point °C
Value
25
2
20
3
4
1
15
-30
-20
-10
0
+10
+20
+30
X = Outdoor air temperature °C
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
5.3.3 Time and schedule
The built-in timer enables you to control the AHU's operating
mode/time. Certain other oversteering functions such as external
timer, communication, etc. affect the preset operating modes.
There are five different operating modes:
Total stop = The AHU is completely stopped, no internal automatic functions or external control commands can start the AHU.
Total stop also oversteers manual operation via the hand-held
terminal.
Time and
schedule
Low speed = The AHU is running at the preset low speed setting.
High speed = The AHU is running at the preset high speed setting.
Normal Stop = The AHU has stopped, however all the internal
and external automatic functions oversteer the stop.
Extended Normal Stop = The AHU has stopped, however all the
internal and external automatic functions, with exception of
Summer night cool, oversteer the stop.
5.3.3.1 Time and date
The current date and time can be set and adjusted if needed. The
timer automatically takes leap years into consideration.
The system is preset for automatic changeover between summer
time/winter time according to EU Standard (an indicator is displayed under summer time). It is possible to block this changeover function.
Time and date
The relevant time zone can be set.
Time source can be set to manual or via SNTP (requires connection to network) and BACnet.
5.3.3.2 Schedule settings
The relevant operating mode can be read under Schedule settings. Here you can also set a preselected operating mode, in
which the air handling unit always operates during non-programmed time, under Day schedule and Exceptions schedule.
This setting (start and stop date not activated) is used most often
and covers the majority of needs.
Schedule settings
When the start and stop date is activated, this means that during the preset period (date) preset time applies during the day
schedule and the exceptions schedule, and at all other times the
AHU runs in the preselected operating mode.
Settings:
Value
Setting range
Preselected operating
mode
Total stop/Low
speed/High speed/
Normal Stop/
Extended Normal
Stop
Active/Inactive
Year/Month/Day
Active/Inactive
Year/Month/Day
Start date
Start date
Stop date
Stop date
Factory settings
Low speed
Inactive
Inactive
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
27
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
5.3.3.3 Day schedule
Times and days can be set when the air handling unit is to run in
the high speed mode, low speed mode or be switched off.
Day schedule
For each day (Monday - Sunday), six different events can
be set to occur at a given point in time. Here, it is also possible to set six different events for two exceptions under
Ex1 and Ex2. The provisions for these exceptions can then
be set under Exceptions schedule, Calendar 1 and Calendar 2.
Note that the preset event will not be carried over to the
next 24-hour period. If no event is set from 00.00 hours of
the next 24-hour period, the AHU will operate in the preselected operating mode preset under Schedule settings.
Settings:
Value
Day
Time
Action
Setting
range
Mon/Tues/Wed/Thurs/Fri/Sat/Sun/Ex1/
Ex2
00:00-23:59
Inactive/Total stop/Low speed/High
speed/Normal Stop/ Extended Normal
Stop/Ignore
Factory settings
00:00
Inactive
5.3.3.4 Exceptions schedule
Possible exceptions (Ex1 and Ex2), previously preset in the day
schedule can be set in the Exceptions schedule. Here you can
determine on which date or weekday the relevant exception shall
apply. If you select Calendar 1 or Calendar 2, which is the most
often the case, these can be set according to particulars in the
next section.
Exceptions schedule
Settings:
Value
Exceptions schedule 1/2
Exceptions method
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Start weekday
Stop date
Stop weekday
28
www.swegon.com
Setting range
Factory settings
Inactive/Date/Date
range/Weekday/
Calendar 1/
Calendar 2
Calendar
1/2
Year/Month/Day
Each day/
Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/
Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Year/Month/Day
Each day/
Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/
Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Year/Month/Day
Each day/
Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/
Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Weekday
Start date
Each day
Start weekday
Each day
Calender 1
Calender 2
Mon 1-12/Odd/
Even/Each
Day 1-7/8-14/1521/22-28/29-31/
Latest 7 days/Each
day
Each day/
Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/
Thursday/Friday/
saturday/Sunday
See next chapter
See next chapter
Each day
Each day
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
5.3.3.5 Calendar 1 and 2
The specific days when Exceptions schedule 1 or 2 shall
apply can be set in Calendars 1 and 2. On condition that
Calendar 1 or 2 is selected, see previous section. In other
cases, these settings will have no effect.
There is a total of ten possible settings under each calendar and various functions can be selected for each.
Settings (For Calendar 1 and Calendar 2 respectively):
Value
Setting range
Function 1-10
Inactive/Date/Date range/
Weekday
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
Start weekday
Calendar 1
Calendar 2
Factory
setting
Inactive
Year/Month/Day
Each day/Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Each day
Year/Month/Day
Year/Month/Day
Month 1-12/Odd/Even/Each
Day 1-7/8-14/15-21/22-28/2931/Latest 7 days/Each day
Each day/Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Each day
5.3.3.6 Prolonged operation
The control unit inputs for external low speed (terminals 14-15)
and external high speed (terminals 16-17) respectively, can be
supplemented with prolonged operation. They can be used for
overtime running activated by a pushbutton, for example.
Prolonged operation
The required time in hours and minutes can be set as follows.
Settings:
Value
Setting range
Ext. low speedt
Ext. high speed
0:00 - 23:59
0:00 - 23:59
(hrs.:min.)
Factory setting
0:00
0:00
(hrs.:min.)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
29
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
5.3.4 Energy monitoring
Status of the power consumed by fans and other AHU components can be viewed here. SFP status for the AHU fans and the
efficiency on heat transfer of the rotary heat exchanger can also
be viewed.
Energy
monitoring
5.3.5 Filters
Basic functions can be set under Installation and the values can
be read and set under User (local).
The filter status and the current alarm limit status for filters with
activated monitoring can be viewed here. Relevant filters are
the Supply air prefilter, Extract air pre-filter, Supply air AHU filter,
Extract air AHU filter, SA and EA AHU filter and Supply air end
filter.
Filters
Filter calibration can be manually activated for each filter. For
more detailed information, see Section 5.2.
5.3.6 Software
The relevant program versions for the IQlogic control unit, IQnavigator hand-held terminal and input units on the communication
bus can be viewed and updated from the SD circuit card inserted
in the IQlogic control unit (this can take a few minutes).
Software
5.3.7 Language
The language desired can be set here. The appropriate language
is normally selected the first time the AHU is started up. However, the language setting can be changed at any time.
Language
Settings:
Value
Language
30
www.swegon.com
Setting
range
Available
languages are
displayed
Factory
setting
English
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6. Installation
6.1 Image Management
If the touch screen is at rest, press the hand-held terminal's On/
Off button.
Profile selection
Guides
Profile selection.
Press on installation. Kod=1111.
Dashboard
Functions
Timer, low speed
Main
setup
Filter
calibration
Stop
Air flow
Temperature
Time and
schedule
Energy
monitoring
Filters
Software
Alarm log
Language
Alarm
prioritys
Log
Air handling
unit
Heat
Cool
Heat/Cool
recovery
SMART Link
Air humidity
ReCO2
All Year
Comfort
MIRU Control
Log graph
Main setup.
See Section 6.2.
Filter calibration.
See Section 6.3.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Flow chart
Dashboard.
Se avsnitt 4.2.2.
Functions.
See Section 6.4
www.swegon.com
31
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.2 Main Setup
Main setup can be selected when installing the AHU and is an
aid for configuring and starting up the AHU.
Time and date, air flow unit, airflow regulation mode, airflow
operation level, temperature regulation, temperature settings
and fan position settings can be entered here.
Main setup
For mosre detailed information, see the relevant function below.
Main setup
See Section 6.4.3.1
See Section 6.4.1.5
See Section 6.4.1.3
See Section 6.4.1.2
See Section 6.4.2.3
See Section 6.4.2.2
See Section 6.4.10.1
1 Time and date
TIME AND DATE
Time
2 Air flow unit
3 Air flow regulation
mode
Date
4 Air flow operation level
Weekday
Wednesday
5 Temperature regulation
Automatic daylight saving function
6 Temperature settings
Daylight saving time
7 Fan position
Time zone
8 Finish
6.3 Filter Calibration
All the filters should be calibrated when the fans are started up
for the first time and when the duct system, air terminals and
commissioning plates, if required, have been installed and commissioned.
Filter calibration
After that every time filters are replaced. Calibration should then
be activated for the filter or filters that are new. Relevant filters
are the Supply air prefilter, Extract air pre-filter, Supply air AHU
filter, Extract air AHU filter, SA and EA AHU filter and Supply air
end filter.
When filter calibration is activated, the air handling unit runs at
the preset max. speed (depending on the functionality selected)
for about 70 seconds.
After the filters have been calibrated, a pressure rise of up to 100
Pa is permissible (as the filters arrest impurities) after which an
alarm indicating fouled filter is initiated. The alarm limit can be
changed under Installation, Functions, Filters.
The filter function must be activated (see Section 6.4.5) in order
to make it possible to enable filter calibration and alarm functions of the end filter and pre-filter in GOLD SD supply air and
extract air handling units.
32
www.swegon.com
Filter calibration
CALIBRATION MODE
Supply air pre-filter
Supply air AHU filter
Extract air pre-filter
Extract air AHU filter
SA and EA pre-filter
SA and EA AHU filter
Supply air end filter
Progress
Start
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4 Functions
6.4.1 Airflow
6.4.1.1 Status
Airflow
All the relevant values can be read here. Used for performance
checks.
Status
6.4.1.2 Operation level
The functions selected and the min. and max. airflows of each
AHU size (see the table below) determine which values can be
set.
Operation level
Depending on the function selected, flows can be set as follows
(l/s, m3/s, m3/h, cfm), pressure (Pa) or input signal strength (%).
Low speed
Should always be preset. The value for low speed cannot be
higher than the value for high speed. Low speed can be set to 0,
which means that the AHU is idle.
High Speed
Should always be preset. The value or pressure for high speed
cannot be lower than the value for low speed.
Max. speed
Should always be preset. Used mainly for filter calibration. While
filter calibration is in progress, the max. speed setting should be
as high as the ventilation system permits without causing any
breakdown. Also used for the pressure regulation, boosting,
Heating Boost and Cooling Boost functions. The value for max
speed cannot be lower than the value for high speed.
Min. /Max. speed
Used for the demand control function (the previous section also
applies to max. speed). Preset the lowest and highest permissible
flows for each fan. This means that the fans will not operate
outside these limits, regardless the load.
Min./Max. flows
AIRFLOW
MIN. FLOW FOR
AIRFLOW REG.,
ALL VARIANTS2
MAX. FLOW, ONE-PIECE
AHU
ROTARY HEAT EXCH.
(RX)
MAX. FLOW,
ONE-PIECE AHU
PLATE H. EXCH.
(PX)
SIZE
m3/h 1
m3/s
m3/h
m3/s
m3/h
m3/s
GOLD 04
288
0,08
1620
0,45
1620
GOLD 05
288
0,08
2340
0,65
2340
GOLD 07
288
0,08
2700
0,75
GOLD 08
720
0,20
3600
GOLD 11
720
0,20
GOLD 12
720
GOLD 14
MAX. FLOW, ONE-PIECE
AHU
COIL H. EXCH. (CX)
m3/h
m3/s
MAX. FLOW, SA AND
EA AHU’S
(SD)
SMALLEST
STEP
m3/h
m3/s
m3/h
m3/s
0,45
2160
0,6
25
0,01
0,65
2880
0,8
25
0,01
2700
0,75
2880
0,8
25
0,01
1,00
3600
1,00
4320
1,2
25
0,01
3960
1,10
3960
1,10
4320
1,2
25
0,01
0,20
5040
1,40
5040
1,40
6480
1,8
25
0,01
720
0,20
5940
1,65
5940
1,65
6480
1,8
25
0,01
GOLD 20
1080
0,30
7560
2,10
7560
2,10
10080
2,8
25
0,01
GOLD 25
1080
0,30
9000
2,50
9000
2,50
10080
2,8
25
0,01
GOLD 30
1800
0,50
11520
3,20
11520
3,20
14400
4,0
25
0,01
GOLD 35
1800
0,50
14040
3,90
14040
3,90
14400
4,0
100
0,05
GOLD 40
2700
0,75
14040/180003
3,90/5,003
14040/180003
3,90/5,003
18000/216003
5,0/6,03
100
0,05
GOLD 50
2160
0,6
18000
5,00
18000
5,00
20160
5,6
100
0,05
GOLD 60
3600
1,00
23400
6,50
23400
6,50
28800
8,0
100
0,05
GOLD 70
3600
1,00
27000
7,50
27000
7,50
28800
8,0
100
0,05
GOLD 80
5400
1,50
34200
9,50
34200
9,50
43200
12,0
100
0,05
GOLD 100
5400
1,50
39600
11,0
39600
11,0
43200
12,0
100
0,05
GOLD 120
9000
2,50
50400
14,0
50400
14,0
64800
18,0
100
0,05
1) When adjusting the flow, round off the value to the nearest settable step.
2) If pressure regulation is used, the airflow can be regulated to zero, however this presupposes a certain static
pressure drop in the ducting (approx. 50 Pa).
3) Cap. variant 1/cap.variant 2
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
33
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.1.3 Regulation mode
The regulation moden can be selected individually for the supply
air or the extract air respectively.
Regulation mode
Airflow
Flow regulation involves operating the air handling unit to keep
the preset airflow constant. The speed of the fans is automatically regulated to provide correct airflow even if the filters begin
to become clogged, if air diffusers become blocked, etc.
A constant airflow is advantageous, since the airflow is always at
the level preset from the beginning.
It should however be noted that everything that increases the
pressure drop in the ventilation system, such as the blocking of
air devices and dust accumulating in the filters, causes the fans
to run at a higher speed. This causes higher power consumption
and may also cause discomfort to the occupants such as excessive sound.
Duct pressure
The airflow automatically varies to provide constant pressure in
the ducting. This type of regulation is therefore also called VAV
Regulation (Variable Air Volume).
Pressure regulation is used when e.g. damper operations
increase the air volume in sections of the ventilation system.
The duct pressure is measured by an external in-duct pressure
sensor which is connected to the control unit's BUS communication. The set point required (separate for low speed and high
speed) is preset in Pa.
The function can be limited so that the fan speed will not exceed
the preset max. values.
Demand
The airflow required is regulated in response to 0-10 V input
signals from an external sensor, such as a carbon dioxide sensor,
connected to control unit terminals 18-19. The required set point
is set as a percentage of the input signal.
The function can be limited so that the flow will not be higher or
lower than the preset max. and min. values respectively.
Slave
The flow is constantly regulated to the same value as the other
fan. If one fan is pressure-controlled or demand-controlled, the
other one can be controlled as a slave to generate the same
airflow.
The performance of the slave fan can be restricted if its maximum flow is set to a lower airflow rate.
It is not possible to control both fans as slaves. If you select one
fan to operate as a slave, you lose the option to select the other
fan as a slave.
Settings:
Value
Supply air
Extract air
34
www.swegon.com
Settings
Airflow
Duct pressure
Demand
Slave
Airflow
Duct pressure
Demand
Slave
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.1.4 Optimize
The Optimize function optimises the air handling unit's airflow
for the connected WISE system; see separate documentation for
the WISE.
Optimize
The function requires that the duct pressure setting is preset
regulation type.
Settings:
Value
Optimize
Setting
range
On/Off
Factory
setting
Off
6.4.1.5 Set point displacement
The airflow is regulated between two flows in response to an
0-10 V DC input signal from an external signal, for example a potentiometer. The TBIQ-3-2 IQlogic+ module accessory is required.
Set point displacement
Set point displacement can be used e.g. in assembly halls, where
a higher rate of air change is needed under full-load conditions.
The function is activated only when the AHU fans operate at
high speed.
On a 0-10 V DC signal, the fans are gradually accelerated from
the AHU’s high speed setting to its max. speed setting. On a
max. input 10 V DC signal, the AHU fans operate at max. speed.
The function must be activated separately for the supply air fan
and for the extract air fan.
Settings:
Value
Supply air
Extract air
Setting
range
On/Off
On/Off
Factory
setting
Off
Off
6.4.1.6 Unit
Unit
The required airflow unit can be set.
Settings:
Value
Unit
Setting
range
l/s
m3/s
m3/h
cfm
Factory
setting
m3/s
6.4.1.7 Air adjustment
The speed of the fans can be locked for up to 72 hours. When
the function is activated, the speed is locked at the current speed
of operation. This is practical when making airflow adjustments
in the duct system and air terminals. The desired period is preset,
but can be interrupted earlier by selecting Stop or by changing
the time setting to 0.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Air adjustment
www.swegon.com
35
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Outdoor air compensation of the airflow can be activated if you
want to change the airflow for specific outdoor air temperatures.
An individually adjusted curve regulates the ratio between the
airflow and the outdoor air temperature. The curve has four
adjustable breakpoints..
If the function is selected solely for low speed or high speed
operation, the curve will regulate only one of these. The airflow
for the operating case that has not been selected will then be
according to the preset set point for airflow/duct pressure.
In the flow regulation mode, the current set point for airflow is
changed. When pressure regulation is selected, the current set
point for pressure is changed. The function has no effect if the
airflow is demand-controlled.
The airflow change is expressed in the preset airflow unit and
pressure in Pa.
Settings:
Value
Outdoor air compensation mode
X1, breakpoint, outdoor air temp.
X2, breakpoint, outdoor air temp.
X3, breakpoint, outdoor air temp.
X4, breakpoint, outdoor air temp.
Supply air, flow
Y1, breakpoint, supply air
Setting
range
Inactive/Low
speed/High
speed/Low
speed and
High speed
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
Factory
setting
Inactive
1)
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
Y2, breakpoint, supply air
1)
Y3, breakpoint, supply air
1)
Y4, breakpoint, supply air
1)
Extract air, flow
Y1, breakpoint, extract air
1)
Y2, breakpoint, extract air
1)
Y3, breakpoint, extract air
1)
Y4, breakpoint, extract air
1)
Supply air, pressure
Y1, breakpoint, supply air
Y2, breakpoint, supply air
Y3, breakpoint, supply air
Y4, breakpoint, supply air
Extract air, pressure
Y1, breakpoint, extract air
Y2, breakpoint, extract air
Y3, breakpoint, extract air
Y4, breakpoint, extract air
1)
Outdoor air
compensation
Y = Set point for airflow, m3/s
6.4.1.8 Outdoor air compensation
3,0
4
2,5
2,0
1
1,5
2
1,0
3
0,5
-30
-20
-10
0
+10
+20
X = Outdoor air temperature °C
Example:
Flow regulated air handling unit The same principle can be applied to a pressure regulated AHU, however this well cause a
reduction in pressure in Pa.
-20 °C
-10 °C
+20 °C
+20 °C
If the outdoor air temperature is under -20 °C (X1), the flow set
point will be a constant 2.0m3/s (Y1).
If the outdoor air temperature is between -20 °C (X1) and -10
°C (X2), the airflow will decrease from 2.0 m3/s (Y1) to 1.0 m3/s
(Y2) as shown in the curve.
If the outdoor air temperature is between -10 °C (X2) and 10 °C
(X3), the flow set point will be a constant 1.0 m3/s (Y2 and Y3).
If the outdoor air temperature is between 10 °C (X3) and 20 °C
(X4), the airflow will increase from 1.0 m3/s (Y3) to 2.5 m3/s (Y4)
as shown in the curve.
If the outdoor air temperature is over 20 °C (X4), the flow set
point will be a constant 2.5 m3/s.
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
20-750 Pa
20-750 Pa
20-750 Pa
20-750 Pa
100 Pa
100 Pa
100 Pa
100 Pa
20-750 Pa
20-750 Pa
20-750 Pa
20-750 Pa
100 Pa
100 Pa
100 Pa
100 Pa
See table for min./max. flows in Section 6.4.1.2
36
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.1.9 Booster diffusers
The function for Booster diffusers is used for controlling the air
damper inside the air terminal and can be activated for heating or cooling. Heating or cooling is modulated depending on
whether the supply air is warmer or colder than the room/extract
air. An indicator is displayed if heating or cooling is active.
Booster diffusers
The IQlogic+ module, TBIQ-3-2, accessory is required.
Value
Setting range
Booster diffusers
On/Off
Factory setting
Off
6.4.1.10 Automatic operation
Density-corrected airflow
The density of the air is different at different temperatures. This
means that a specific volume of air changes at various air densities. The AHU automatically corrects this, so that correct air
volume is always obtained.
The control equipment always displays the corrected airflow.
Pressure balance corrected extract airflow
The extract airflow is corrected by continuously measuring the
pressure balance across the rotary heat exchanger. The extract
airflow is guaranteed with consideration given to the air purging
and leakage air flow.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
37
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.2 Temperature
N.B.! If the entry of new temperature settings involve large
changes, you should first stop the AHU before you enter the new
settings.
Specific temperatures, such as set points, should be specified in
°C, whereas displacements, deviations and differentials should
be specified in K (Kelvin).
If only GOLD SD supply air handling units are installed, they
require an external room sensor for ERS, ORE and extract air
regulation.
6.4.2.1 Status
Temperature
Status
All the relevant values can be read here. Used for performance
checks.
Settings
6.4.2.2 Settings
ERS Regulation 1
Under normal circumstances, the supply air temperature is
regulated to be a few degrees lower than the extract air temperature. In this way, the heat exchanger will provide optimal
performance, and this means excellent operating economy.
ERS control is suitable for use when there is surplus heat in the
premises generated e.g. by machinery, lighting or people, and
the premises have supply air diffusers suitable for discharging air
below room temperature.
ERS Regulation 1
The control unit regulates the ratio between the supply air and
extract air temperature according to a factory-preset curve.
See the diagram to the right.
The step in the curve, breakpoint and differential can be
changed.
Settings:
Value
p1
20
Breakpoint
.
ff
15
S
ER
1
di
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
10
12
Ste
15
20
25
Extract air temperature °C
Factory setting means:
Setting
range
Extract related supply air-1 step
Extract related supply air-1 diff
Extract related supply air-1
breakpoint
(refers to extract air temperature)
ERS Regulation 1
Supply air temperature set point °C
ERS regulation refers to Extract air temperature-Related Supply
air temperature regulation. This means that the temperature of
the supply air is regulated in relation to the temperature of the
extract air.
1-4
1-7 K
12-26 °C
Factory
setting
2
3K
22 °C
If the extract air temperature is below 22 °C (breakpoint), the
supply air temperature set point will be automatically regulated
to be 3 K (diff.) lower.
If the extract air temperature is above 22 °C, the supply air temperature set point will constantly be 19 °C (step 2).
The setting range for breakpoint and deviation are limited by the
min. and max. settings.
38
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Used if the factory preset performance curve in the ERS Control
1 function does not provide the results desired to meet special
needs and conditions. Depending on which setting have been
entered, the installation of an air heater for reheating may be
required.
An individually adjusted curve regulates the ratio between the
supply air and the extract air temperature. The curve has four
adjustable breakpoints..
See the diagram to the right.
Settings:
Value
Extract air temperature
Extract related supply air-2 X1
Extract related supply air-2 X2
Extract related supply air-2 X3
Extract related supply air-2 X4
Supply air temperature set point
Extract related supply air-2 Y1
Extract related supply air-2 Y2
Extract related supply air-2 Y3
Extract related supply air-2 Y4
Setting
range
Factory
setting
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
15 °C
20 °C
22 °C
22 °C
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
10-40 °C
20 °C
18 °C
14 °C
12 °C
ERS Regulation 2
22
Y = Supply air temperature set point °C
ERS Regulation 2
20
1
2
15
3
4
10
9
12
15
20
25
27
X = Extract air temperature °C
Breakpoints according to factory setting involve the following:
The set point displacement and Summer night cool functions can
also affect the preset temperatures.
If the extract air temperature is below 15°C (X1), the supply air
temperature set point will constantly be 20 °C (Y1).
Supply air regulation
If the extract air temperature is between 15 °C (X1) and 20 °C
(X2), the supply air temperature set point is regulated from 20
°C (Y1) down to 18 °C (Y2) as shown in the curve.
Supply air regulation involves maintaining a constant supply air
temperature without consideration to the load in the premises.
This type of regulation can be used when the load and temperatures of the premises are predictable. In most cases this requires
the installation of an air heater for reheating, possibly an air
cooler as well.
Settings:
Value
Supply air (temp. set point)
Setting
range
0-40 °C
Factory
setting
21 °C
If the extract air temperature is between 20 °C (X2) and 22 °C
(X3), the supply air temperature set point is regulated from 18
°C (Y2) down to 14 °C (Y3) as shown in the curve.
When the extract air temperature is 22 °C (X4), the supply air
temperature set point is regulated from 14 °C (Y3) down to 12
°C (Y4).
If the extract air temperature is over 22 °C (X4), the supply air
temperature set point will constantly be 12 °C (Y4).
Extract air regulation
Extract air control involves maintaining a constant temperature
in the extract air duct (the premises), by regulating the supply air
temperature.
This provides a uniform temperature in the premises regardless
of the load and this type of regulation requires the installation of
an air heater for reheating; possibly a cooling coil as well.
The extract air temperature is measured by the air handling unit's
internal temperature sensor. If this internal temperature sensor
does not give an adequate representative extract air temperature
reading, an external room temperature sensor can be installed
and wired to the control unit’s communications BUS (optional
COM1-3).
Settings:
Value
Extract air (temp. set point)
Supply air, min.
Supply air, max.
Setting
range
0-40 °C
0-20 °C
16-50 °C
Factory
setting
21 °C
16 °C
28 °C
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
39
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
ORS regulation refers to Outdoor air temperature-Related Supply
air temperature regulation. This means that the temperature of
the supply air is regulated in relation to the temperature of the
outdoor air.
An individually adjusted curve regulates the ratio between the
supply air and the outdoor air temperature. The curve has four
adjustable breakpoints.
Settings (see also diagram to the right):
Outdoor air temperature
Outdoor related supply air X1
Outdoor related supply air X2
Outdoor related supply air X3
Outdoor related supply air X4
Supply air temperature set point
Outdoor related supply air Y1
Outdoor related supply air Y2
Outdoor related supply air Y3
Outdoor related supply air Y4
Setting
range
Factory
setting
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-20 °C
-10 °C
10 °C
20 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
21.5 °C
21.5 °C
21.5 °C
21,5 °C
ORE regulation refers to Outdoor air temperature-Related Extract
air temperature regulation. This means that the extract air temperature is regulated in relation to the outdoor air temperature.
An individually adjusted curve regulates the ratio between the
extract air and the outdoor air temperature. The curve has four
adjustable breakpoints.
Settings (see also diagram to the right):
Outdoor air temperature
Outdoor related extract air X1
Outdoor related extract air X2
Outdoor related extract air X3
Outdoor related extract air X4
Extract air temperature set point
Outdoor related extract air Y1
Outdoor related extract air Y2
Outdoor related extract air Y3
Outdoor related extract air Y4
40
www.swegon.com
2
20
3
4
1
15
-30
-20
-10
0
+10
+20
+30
X = Outdoor air temperature °C
ORE regulation
ORE regulation
Value
25
Example:
If the outdoor air temperature is under -30 °C (X1), the supply
air temperature set point will constantly be 18 °C (Y1).
If the outdoor air temperature is between -30 °C (X1) and -10
°C (X2), the supply air temperature set point is regulated from
18 °C (Y1) up to 20 °C (Y2) as shown in the curve.
If the outdoor temperature is between -10 °C (X2) and +10 °C
(X3) the supply air set point will constantly be 20 °C (Y3).
If the outdoor air temperature is between +10 °C (X3) and +30
°C (X4), the supply air temperature set point is regulated from
20 °C (Y3) down to 18 °C (Y4) as shown in the curve.
If the outdoor air temperature is over 30 °C (X4), the supply air
temperature set point will constantly be 18 °C (Y4).
Setting
range
Factory
setting
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-50 – +50 °C
-20 °C
-10 °C
10 °C
20 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
10 – 40 °C
21.5 °C
21,5 °C
21,5 °C
21,5 °C
Y = Extract air temperature set point °C
Value
Y = Supply air temperature set point °C
ORS regulation
ORS regulation
25
2
20
3
4
1
15
-30
-20
-10
0
+10
+20
+30
X = Outdoor air temperature °C
Example:
If the outdoor air temperature is under -30 °C (X1), the extract
air temperature set point will constantly be 18 °C (Y1).
If the outdoor air temperature is between -30 °C (X1) and -10
°C (X2), the extract air temperature set point is regulated from
18 °C (Y1) up to 20 °C (Y2) as shown in the curve.
If the outdoor temperature is between -10 °C (X2) and +10 °C
(X3) the extract air set point will constantly be 20 °C (Y3).
If the outdoor air temperature is between +10 °C (X3) and +30
°C (X4), the extract air temperature set point is regulated from
20 °C (Y3) down to 18 °C (Y4) as shown in the curve.
If the outdoor air temperature is over 30 °C (X4), the extract air
temperature set point will constantly be 18 °C (Y4).
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.2.3 Regulation mode
Select ERS 1, ERS 2, Supply air, Extract air, ORS or ORE regulation
Regulation mode
Settings:
Value
Temperature
regulation mode
Setting
range
ERS 1/ERS 2/Supply air/
Extract air/ORS/ORE
Factory
setting
Supply air
6.4.2.4 Set point displacement
Used for changing the supply air and extract air temperature set
points by means of an external 0-10 VDC signal. For example,
the temperature can be increased or decreased at certain times
of the day by means of an external timer or potentiometer.
Set point displacement
The accessory, IQlogic+ module TBIQ-3-2, is required.
If the AHU is operating in the supply air regulation or ORS regulation mode, the supply air temperature set point is displaced and
the AHU is operating in the extract air regulation or ORE regulation mode, the extract air temperature set point is displaced.
When the AHU is operating in the ERS regulation 1 mode, the
difference between extract air and supply air is influenced. The
difference cannot be less than 0 °C. The difference will decrease
as the input signal increases.
If the AHU is operating in the ERS regulation 2 mode, the supply
air set point will be displaced.
When the function is activated, the set point is displaced as plotted in the diagram to the right.
Set point displacement will not affect any possible extra temperature zone (Xzone) which regulates according to its ordinary
set point if set point displacement is in operation.
Settings:
Value
Setting range
Set point displacement
On/Off
Factory setting
Off
6.4.2.5 Neutral zone
The neutral zone prevents the cooling and heating systems from
counteracting each other.
Set point displacement °C
The set point can be influenced by ±5 °C.
+5
+4
+3
+2
+1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
0
5
Control signal V DC
10
Set point displacement involves the following:
Control signal 0 V DC: The set point is decreased by 5 °C.
Control signal 5 V DC: No change in set point.
Control signal 10 V DC: The set point increases by 5 °C.
Neutral zone
The preset neutral zone is added to the set point for heating and
the sum of these provides the set point for cooling.
When extract air regulation is active, the supply air set point is
not affected. The neutral zone has no effect if the unit is operating in the ERS regulation mode.
Settings:
Value
Setting range
Supply air neutral zone
Extract air neutral zone
0.0 - 10 K
0.0 - 10 K
Factory setting
0.5 K
0.5 K
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
41
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.2.6 External temperature sensors
An extract air duct temperature sensor, TBLZ-1-76, can be connected to the air handling unit’s control circuit card. See separate
instructions for installation.
External temperature
sensors
Up to four external room temperature and/or outdoor temperature sensors can be wired to the air handling unit’s control circuit
card. The TBLZ-1-24-2 room temperature sensor or TBLZ-1-24-3
outdoor temperature sensor accessories should be used. See
separate installation instructions.
Locate the temperature sensors at suitable places to obtain representative readings.
The air handling unit is controlled in response to a computed
mean value of the temperature sensors' readings, alternatively in
response to signals from the temperature sensor that measures
the lowest or highest value.
As an alternative, a temperature reading can be transmitted to
the air handling via communication from e.g. a main system.
The same provision is available for room sensors for the Xzone
function.
Settings:
Value
Extract air duct,
temperature sensor
Room sensor 1
Room sensor 2
Room sensor 3
Room sensor 4
Room sensor function
Room temperature from
communication
Outdoor air sensor 1
Outdoor air sensor 2
Outdoor air sensor 3
Outdoor air sensor 4
Outdoor air sensor
function
Outdoor temperature from
communication
42
www.swegon.com
Setting
range
On/Off
Factory
setting
Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
Medium/min./Max.
On/Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Medium
Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
Medium/min./Max.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Medium
On/Off
Off
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.2.7 Regulation sequence
Heating mode
The mutual order for the heating mode regulation sequence can
be selected as specified below.
Regulation sequence
Functions that have not been selected have no effect on the
relevant regulation sequence.
Value
Heating mode
Setting
range
1/2/3/4/5/6*
Factory
setting
1
* 1 = HX - Extra regulation sequence - ReCO2 - Reheating Down regulation of fan
2 = HX - Extra regulation sequence - Reheating - ReCO2 Down regulation of fan
3 = HX - Reheating - ReCO2 - Extra regulation sequence Down regulation of fan
4 = HX - Reheating - Extra regulation sequence - ReCO2 Down regulation of fan
5 = HX - ReCO2 - Reheating - Extra regulation sequence Down regulation of fan
6 = HX - ReCO2 - Extra regulationsequence - Reheating Down regulation of fan
HX (heat exchanger):
The temperature efficiency of the air handling unit’s heat
exchanger is modulated to provide max. heat recovery.
Extra regulation sequence:
Used in the heating mode for air heater (if required), air recirculation damper, etc.
ReCO2:
Recirculated air is variably mixed in up to the lowest permissible
supply airflow. Assumes inclusion of the TCBR air recirculation
section accessory.
Reheating:
Air heater for reheating provides heating capacity.
Down regulation of fan:
Down regulation can be selected for supply air only or supply air
and extract air.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
43
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Cooling mode
The mutual order for the cooling mode regulation sequence can
be selected as specified below.
Functions that have not been selected have no effect on the
relevant regulation sequence.
Value
Cooling mode
Setting
range
1/2/3/4/5/6*
Factory
setting
1
* 1 = HX - Cooling Boost - Extra regulation sequence - ReCO2 Cooling
2 = HX - Cooling Boost - Extra regulation sequence - Cooling - ReCO2
3 = HX -Cooling Boost - Cooling - ReCO2 - Extra regulation sequence
4 = HX - Cooling Boost - Cooling - Extra regulation sequence - ReCO2
5 = HX - ReCO2 - Cooling Boost - Cooling - Extra regulation sequence
6 = HX - ReCO2 - Cooling Boost - Extra regulation sequence - Cooling
HX (heat exchanger):
The temperature efficiency of the air handling unit’s heat
exchanger is modulated to provide max. cool recovery.
Cooling Boost (Economy):
Involves increasing the supply air and extract air airflows to
convey more cooling energy to the premises. The flow increase
takes place between the current flow and the preset max. flow.
Extra regulation sequence:
Used in the cooling mode for air cooler (if required), etc.
ReCO2:
Recirculated air is variably mixed in up to the lowest permissible
supply airflow. Assumes inclusion of the TCBR air recirculation
section accessory.
Cooling:
Air cooler provides cooling capacity.
6.4.2.8 Min. exhaust air
The min. exhaust air function can be used whenever the
exhaust air temperature is not permitted to be below a
predetermined value.
Min. exhaust air
The function controls the heat exchanger rotor speed (efficiency)
in order to limit the exhaust air temperature to the required
value. The function decelerates the heat exchanger rotor speed
from the current level, until the exhaust air temperature reaches
the preset minimum permissible setting.
Exhaust air regulation requires a separateTBLZ-1-58-aa temperature sensor (accessory) fitted in the AHU's exhaust air.
See separate installation instructions for the TBLZ-1-58-aa Internal temperature sensor.
Settings:
Value
Min. exhaust air
Min. exhaust air temperature
44
www.swegon.com
Setting
range
On/Off
-40 – + 20,0 °C
Factory
setting
Off
5.0 °C
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.2.9 Morning Boost
The unit is utilised for heating the premises during a preset
period prior to the switch-in time set on the timer.
Morning Boost
The function is used if an air recirculation section is installed.
The AHU starts up prematurely and uses the same temperature
regulation settings. The airflow / air pressure is adjustable.
When the function starts, the air recirculation damper opens and
the supply air fan starts up. The extract air fan and the outdoor
air damper remain closed.
Settings:
Value
Morning Boost
Start time (before the
ordinary start time
according to the timer)
Supply air, set point
Setting
range
On/Off
hour:min.
Factory
setting
Off
00:00
1)
50% of max.
supply air for
AHU alt. 100 Pa
The setting range is the same as the AHU's min./max. setting
for flow regulation and 10-750 Pa for pressure regulation
1)
6.4.2.10 Heating Boost
Heating boost (forced heating) means that the air handling unit,
operating in the normal flow regulation mode, increases both
the supply airflow and the extract airflow in order to carry more
heat into the premises.
Heating Boost
The fans are permitted to operate in the range between current
flow modes or pressure (low speed, high speed) and the preset
max speed. See Section 6.4.1.2.
The functions operates only when the AHU is operating in the
extract air regulation and ORE regulation mode. If demand
control or boost is selected in combination with heating boost,
the flow is controlled by the function that transmits the highest
output signal to the fans.
A regulated ramp function switches in and gradually increases
the airflow when there is a heating load, and the supply air
temperature is 3 K (preset at factory) lower than the preset max.
supply air temperature.
Settings:
Value
Heating Boost
Start limit
Setting
range
On/Off
2-10 K
Factory
setting
Off
3K
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
45
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.2.11 Cooling Boost
Cooling Boost (forced cooling) means that the supply air and
extract air airflows are increased to convey more cool air to the
premises.
Cooling Boost
The fans are permitted to operate in the range between current
flow modes or pressure (low speed, high speed) and the preset
max speed. See Section 6.4.1.2.
The function can be selected in five variants as follows:
Comfort
The cooling outputs are activated if there is a cooling load.
A regulated ramp function switches in and gradually increases
the airflow when there is a cooling load, and the supply air
temperature is 3 K (preset at factory) higher than the preset max.
supply air temperature.
Economy
Cooling Boost Economy initially uses a higher airflow to cool the
premises, before a start signal is transmitted to chillers.
The function can also operate without the cooling function
activated.
In the event of a cooling load, the airflows are slowly increased
up to preset maximum flow. When the flows are up to max and
if a cooing load is still present, the output contacts for cooling
are activated.
The function requires that the outdoor air temperature is at least
2 K lower than the extract air temperature for it to be activated.
The normal cooling function is activated if the temperature difference is too small.
Sequence
The Cooling Boost Sequence is used if a chiller is sized for a
higher cooling flow than normal flow.
If there is a cooling load, the flow is increased up to the preset
max. flow at the same time that the cooling function is activated.
The Cooling Boost Sequence is blocked if no cooling function
has been selected.
Comfort and economy
The comfort variant and the economy variant can be combined.
When free cooling is available, the economy function is active; if
free cooling is not available, the comfort function is active.
Economy and sequence
The economy variant and the sequence variant can be combined. When free cooling is available the economy function is
active. When free cooling is not available the sequence function
is active.
Settings:
Value
Cooling Boost
Start limit (Comfort)
46
www.swegon.com
Setting
range
Inactive
Comfort
Economy
Sequence
Comfort and
economy
Economy and
sequence
2-10 K
Factory
setting
Inactive
3K
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.2.12 Intermittent night heat
The AHU is utilized for heating the premises when it is normally
stopped by timer.
Intermittent night heat
The function requires that an external room sensor is wired to
the control unit’s communication BUS (optional COM 1-3) and
that the AHU is fitted with an air heater for reheating the air. The
function works best if the GOLD is equipped with an air recirculation section and shut-off dampers for the outdoor air and the
exhaust air.
When the function is activated, the air handling unit detects
when the room temperature drops below the preset start temperature. The unit starts with preset flows and the supply air
temperature set point.
If the extract air fan is not required to operate, the extract airflow
can be set to 0.
The damper output can be set to 0. This means that connected
dampers (e.g. shut-off dampers for outdoor air and exhaust air)
are not affected. These dampers are normally closed when the
AHU is stopped and accordingly they remain closed. At the same
time the damper in the air recirculation section opens, if one is
installed.
Intermittent night heat does not affect any possible extra temperature zone (Xzone) which regulates according to its ordinary
set point if Intermittent night heat is in operation.
EXTRACT AIR
Conditions to be met for intermittent night-time heating to start:
• The AHU must be set to normal stop or extended
normal stop.
• The room temperature must be lower than the preset start
temperature.
Conditions to be met so that Intermittent night heat will stop:
• The air handling unit is running at normal low/high speed or
external/manual stop has been activated.
• The room temperature exceeds the preset stop temperature.
• The alarm with preset stop priority trips.
(If needed, the air handling unit fans will continue to operate
to cool the electric air heater although other conditions for
stop have been met.)
Settings:
Value
Intermittent night heat
Air recirculation
Room temperature, start
Room temperature, stop
Supply air temperature, set
point
Supply airflow, set point
Extract air flow, set point
Setting
range
On/Off
On/Off
5 - 25 °C
5 - 25 °C
5 - 50 °C
Factory
setting
Off
On
16 °C
18 °C
28 °C
1)
50% of max.
supply air for
AHU alt. 100 Pa
50% of max.
supply air for
AHU alt. 100 Pa
1)
SUPPLY AIR
Intermittent night heat with air recirculation section:
If the extract airflow is set to 0 and the damper output is not
activated, the following occurs:
When conditions for start are met, outdoor air and exhaust air
shut-off dampers remain closed. The damper in the air recirculation section opens. The extract air fan is idle.
The supply air fan operates according to the preset supply airflow and the air heater for reheating operates according to the
preset supply air temperature set point, until the conditions for
stop are met.
The setting range is the same as the AHU's min./max. setting
for flow regulation and 10-750 Pa for pressure regulation
1)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
47
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.2.13 Summer night cool
The lower temperature at night is utilised to cool down the
building structure. This reduces the cooling load during the first
hours of the day. If a cooling unit is installed, it will not need to
be operated, thus offering savings. If no cooling unit is installed,
a certain cooling effect will still be achieved.
Summer night cool
When the function is activated, the AHU fans operate at high
speed, with a supply air set point of 10 °C (factory setting) from
the preset time until the conditions necessary for stop are satisfied.
An extra temperature zone (Xzone), if required, obtains the same
supply air set point if Summer night cool is in operation.
Conditions that must be met for Summer night cool to start at
the preset time:
• The time is between the preset start time and stop time.
• The outdoor air temperature shall be higher than the preset
value.
• The extract air temperature shall be higher than the preset
value.
• The extract air is at least 2 °C warmer than the outdoor air.
• Heating has not been required between 12.00 and 23.59
hours.
• The air handling unit shall be running at low speed or be in
the normal stop operating mode.
• Intermittent night heat has not been active during the day.
Conditions that must be met for Summer night cool to stop:
• The time is not between the preset start time and stop time.
• The extract air temperature drops below the preset value.
• The outdoor temperature drops below the preset value.
• The extract air is less than 1 °C warmer than the outdoor air.
• The air handling unit is running at normal high speed or
external/manual stop has been activated.
The function starts once per preset time period.
Settings:
Value
Summer night cool
Start time
Stop time
Outdoor air, start
Extract air, start
Extract air, stop
Supply air, set point
48
www.swegon.com
Setting
range
On/Off
00:00-00:00
00:00-00:00
-5 - +15 °C
17 - 27 °C
12 - 22 °C
0 - 20 °C
Factory
setting
Off
23:00
06:00
10 °C
22 °C
16 °C
10 °C
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.2.14 Down regulation (airflow/pressure)
Down regulation of the supply air flow is the last step in the
regulation sequence for heating. The supply air fan or both the
supply air and extract air fan can be selected. The extract air fan
only cannot be selected.
Down regulation
See also Section 6.4.2.7.
An adjustable reduction in temperature permits a lower supply
air temperature set point, before down regulation comes into
effect (Neutral zone).
Down regulation can take place to max. of 50% of the preset
value, however not lower than the min. flow or 20 Pa.
Settings:
Value
Down regulation
Neutral zone
Setting
range
Inactive/Supply
air/Supply air and
extract air
0.0-10.0 K
Factory
setting
Supply air
0.0 K
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
49
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.3 Time and schedule
The built-in timer enables you to control the AHU's operating
mode/time. Certain other oversteering functions such as external
timer, communication, etc. affect the preset operating modes.
There are five different operating modes:
Total stop = The AHU is completely stopped, no internal automatic functions or external control commands can start the AHU.
Normal Stop = The AHU has stopped, however all the internal
and external automatic functions oversteer the stop.
Extended Normal Stop = The AHU has stopped, however all the
internal and external automatic functions, with exception of
Summer night cool, oversteer the stop.
Low speed = The AHU is running at the preset low speed setting.
High speed = The AHU is running at the preset high speed setting.
Time and
schedule
6.4.3.1 Time and date
The current date and time can be set and adjusted if needed. The
timer automatically takes leap years into consideration.
Time and date
The system is preset for automatic changeover between summer
time/winter time according to EU Standard (an indicator is displayed under summer time). It is possible to block this changeover function.
The relevant time zone can be set.
Time source can be set to manual or via SNTP (requires connection to network) and BACnet.
Schedule settings
6.4.3.2 Schedule settings
The relevant operating mode can be read under Schedule settings. Here you can also set a preselected operating mode, in
which the air handling unit always operates during non-programmed time, under Day schedule and Exceptions schedule.
This setting (start and stop date not activated) is used most often
and covers the majority of needs.
When the start and stop date is activated, this means that during the preset period (date) preset time applies during the day
schedule and the exceptions schedule, and at all other times the
AHU runs in the preselected operating mode.
Settings:
Value
Setting range
Preselected operating
mode
Total stop/Low
speed/High speed/
Normal Stop/
Extended Normal
Stop
Active/Inactive
Year/Month/Day
Active/Inactive
Year/Month/Day
Start date
Start date
Stop date
Stop date
50
www.swegon.com
Factory settings
Low speed
Inactive
Inactive
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.3.3 Day schedule
Times and days can be set when the air handling unit is to run in
the high speed mode, low speed mode or be switched off.
Day schedule
For each day (Monday - Sunday), six different events can
be set to occur at a given point in time. Here, it is also possible to set six different events for two exceptions under
Ex1 and Ex2. The provisions for these exceptions can then
be set under Exceptions schedule, Calendar 1 and Calendar 2.
Note that the preset event will not be carried over to the
next 24-hour period. If no event is set from 00.00 hours of
the next 24-hour period, the AHU will operate in the preselected operating mode preset under Schedule settings.
Settings:
Value
Day
Time
Action
Setting
range
Mon/Tues/Wed/Thurs/Fri/Sat/Sun/Ex1/
Ex2
00:00-23:59
Inactive/Total stop/Low speed/High
speed/Normal Stop/ Extended Normal
Stop/Ignore
Factory
settings
00:00
Inactive
6.4.3.4 Exceptions schedule
Possible exceptions (Ex1 and Ex2), previously preset in the day
schedule can be set in the Exceptions schedule. Here you can
determine on which date or weekday the relevant exception shall
apply. If you select Calendar 1 or Calendar 2, which is the most
often the case, these can be set according to particulars in the
next section.
Exceptions schedule
Settings:
Value
Exceptions schedule 1/2
Exceptions method
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Start weekday
Stop date
Stop weekday
Setting range
Factory settings
Inactive/Date/Date
range/Weekday/
Calendar 1/
Calendar 2
Calendar
1/2
Year/Month/Day
Each day/
Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/
Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Year/Month/Day
Each day/
Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/
Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Year/Month/Day
Each day/
Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/
Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Each day
Each day
Weekday
Start date
Start weekday
Calender 1
Calender 2
Mon 1-12/Odd/
Even/Each
Day 1-7/8-14/1521/22-28/29-31/
Latest 7 days/Each
day
Each day/
Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/
Thursday/Friday/
saturday/Sunday
See next chapter
See next chapter
Each day
Each day
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
51
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.3.5 Calendar 1 and 2
The specific days when Exceptions schedule 1 or 2 shall
apply can be set in Calendars 1 and 2. On condition that
Calendar 1 or 2 is selected, see previous section. In other
cases, these settings will have no effect.
There is a total of ten possible settings under each calendar and various functions can be selected for each.
Settings (For Calendar 1 and Calendar 2 respectively):
Value
Function 1-10
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
Start weekday
Setting
range
Inactive/Date/Date range/
Weekday
Year/Month/Day
Each day/Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Calendar 1
Calendar 2
Factory
setting
Inactive
Each day
Year/Month/Day
Year/Month/Day
Month 1-12/Odd/Even/Each
Day 1-7/8-14/15-21/22-28/2931/Latest 7 days/Each day
Each day/Monday/Tuesday/
Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Each day
6.4.3.6 Prolonged operation
The control unit inputs for external low speed (terminals 14-15)
and external high speed (terminals 16-17) respectively, can be
supplemented with Prolonged operation. They can be used for
overtime running activated by a pushbutton, for example.
Prolonged operation
The required time in hours and minutes can be set as follows.
Settings:
Value
Ext. low speedt
Ext. high speed
52
www.swegon.com
Setting
range
0:00 - 23:59
0:00 - 23:59
(hrs.:min.)
Factory
setting
00:00
00:00
(hrs.:min.)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.4 Energy monitoring
Readings of the power consumed by fans and other AHU components can be viewed here. SFP readings for the AHU fans and
the efficiency on heat transfer of the rotary heat exchanger can
also be viewed.
Energy
monitoring
6.4.5 Filters
Status
The current filter status and the current alarm limit can be
viewed here. Used for performance checks.
Filters
Calibration
The filters should be calibrated when the fans are started up for
the first time and when the duct system, air terminals and commissioning plates, if required, have been installed and commissioned. After that every time filters are replaced. See also Section
6.3.
Pre-filter/AHU filter (GOLD SD)/End filter
Filter monitoring must be activated for the filter (in addition to
the internal filter in the GOLD RX/PX/CX) to be monitored.
Settings:
Value
Pre-filter
AHU filters
End filter
Setting
range
Inactive/Supply air/Extract air/
Supply air and extract air
Inactive/Supply air/Extract air/
Supply air and extract air
On/Off
Factory
setting
Inactive
Inactive
Off
Alarm limits
Alarm limit for installed filters can be changed.
Setting:
Value
Setting
range
0-500 Pa
Installed filters
Factory
setting
100 Pa
6.4.6 Software
The current program versions for the IQlogic control unit,
IQnavigator hand-held terminal and the component units
on the communications bus can be viewed and updated
from the SD circuit card.
Software
6.4.7 Language
The language desired can be set here. The appropriate language
is normally selected the first time the AHU is started up. However, the language setting can be changed at any time.
Settings:
Value
Language
Setting
range
Available languages are
displayed
Language
Factory
setting
English
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
53
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.8 Alarm settings
6.4.8.1 Fire alarms
Internal fire alarm
Alarm settings
The air handling unit’s internal temperature sensors serve as
fire protection thermostats. An alarm is initiated if the supply
air temperature sensor registers more than 70 °C or when the
extract air temperature sensor registers more than 50 °C.
If an external Extract air/Room temperature sensor is connected
and activated, this works parallel with the extract air temperature
sensor of the AHU.
Fire alarms
External firee alarm 1 and 2
External fire alarm 1 (Terminals 6-7) and external fire alarm 2
(Terminals 8-9) are used for external fire-control equipment.
Alarm reset
The resetting of internal fire alarms as well as the external fire
alarms 1 and 2 can be individually selected to manual or automatic.
After cool
The After cool function for electric air heaters can be individually
activated, for internal fire alarms as well as external fire alarms 1
and 2.
Fan operation at fire alarm
The fans of the air handling unit can be used for evacuating
smoke, etc. The activated function operates together with the
external fire/smoke function or internal fire alarm. It is possible
to individually select the type of fan operation for each separate
fire alarm.
If the AHU is idle, the fans selected start up (10-100%), irrespective of whether stop (all types) is activated.
The AHU's damper relay is energized and the AHU's operation
relay is de-energized. The damper that should be open in event
of fire, shall be connected to the damper relay (control unit terminals 28-30). The damper that should be closed in event of fire,
shall be connected to the operation relay (control unit terminals
26-27).
Priority
The mutual priority of the internal and the external fire alarms
can be set. If automatic is selected, this means that the first input
to be activated is given priority.
Settings:
Value
Setting range
Internal fire alarm
Internal fire alarm reset
Internal fire alarm after
cool
External fire alarm 1/2,
resetting
External fire alarm 1/2,
after cool
Fan operation on an
internal fire alarm
On/Off
Manual/Auto
Active/Inactive
Factory settings
Off
Manual
Inactive
Manual/Auto
Manual
Active/Inactive
Inactive
Inactive/Supply air/
Extract air/Supply
air and extract air
10-100%
Inactive
10-100%
100%
Inactive/Supply air/
Extract air/Supply
air and extract air
10-100%
Inactive
10-100%
100%
External fire
alarm 1/External
fire alarm 2/
Internal fire alarm/
Automatic
External fire
alarm 1
Supply air fan on an
internal fire alarm
Extract air fan on an internal fire alarm
Fan operation on external
fire alarm 1/2
Supply air fan on external
fire alarm 1/2
Extract air fan on external
fire alarm 1/2
Order of priority
54
www.swegon.com
100%
100%
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.8.2 External alarms
External alarms can be used for external functions (control unit
terminals 10-11 and 12-13).
External alarms
Typical uses:
– Motor protection for the circulation pump in the heating or
cooling circuit.
– Service alarm actuated by smoke detectors.
Set the following: Manual or automatic alarm reset, post-cooling
for electric air heater and whether the alarm shall be activated
on a closed or open circuit. The alarm can be time delayed.
Settings:
Value
External alarm 1 reset
External alarm 1 after cool
External alarm 1 input
External alarm 1
delay time
External alarm 2 reset
External alarm 2 after cool
External alarm 2 input
External alarm 2
delay time
Setting
range
Manual/Auto
Inactive/Active
Closed circuit/
Open circuit
0-600 sec.
Factory
setting
Manual
Active
Closed
circuit
10 sec.
Manual/Auto
Inactive/Active
Closed circuit/
Open circuit
0-600 sec.
Manual
Active
Closed
circuit
10 sec.
6.4.8.3 Temperature guard
In the GOLD PX and CX units, the sensor in the inlet of the supply
air fan can be used as a temperature guard . Alarm priority and
whether the AHU shall stop or not in event of an alarm can be
set under Alarm priorities, se Section 6.4.8.6.
Temperature guard
In the GOLD RX units, a separate sensor can be used. The sensor
should be wired to the control unit. Select sensor input 4 for
supply air = right and select sensor input 3 for supply air = left.
The alarm limit and alarm delay can be set for the sensor.
Settings:
Value
Temperature guard
Alarm delay
Alarm limit
Setting
range
On/Off
1-900 sec.
3 – +20°C
Factory
setting
Off
30 sec.
7°C
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
55
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.8.4 Temperature alarm limits
Changes in the factory-preset alarm limits should only be
made if you have special reasons for doing so and you
should be aware of the consequences.
Temperature alarm limits
Pre-heating below set point
You can preset how much the temperature downstream of the
pre-heater should be permitted to be below the temperature set
point before an alarm is initiated.
Supply air below/above set point
You can preset how much the supply air temperature shall be
permitted to be below or above the supply air temperature set
point before an alarm is initiated. The alarm for supply air above
the set point is normally blocked. Used in the cases in which
cooling is installed.
Extract air below alarm limit
You can preset how much the extract air temperature shall be
permitted to be below the extract air temperature set point
before an alarm is initiated.
Outdoor temperature, limit stop
If the outdoor air temperature is above this stop limit, only an
alarm will be initiated and if it is below the stop limit, the AHU
will stop and an alarm will be initiated. Applies to the following
heat exchanger alarm numbers: 15:1-15:4, 16;1-16:4, 17:1,
17:4-17:9. See Section 8.2.
Settings:
Value
Pre-heat below set point
Supply air below set point
Supply air above set point
Extract air below alarm limit
Outdoor temperature limit stop
Setting
range
2 - 15 K
2 - 15 K
2 - 15 K
-8 - +20 °C
-40 – +50 °C
Factory
setting
5.0 K
5.0 K
7.0 K
12,0 °C
5.0 °C
6.4.8.5 Service period
The air handling unit's service period can be set here. The remaining time to alarm can be read. An alarm will be initiated
after the time interval has expired. If you reset the alarm in the
alarm log, the alarm will trip again after 7 days. Following completed service, the alarm must always be reset in this menu and
this will launch a new service interval.
Service period
Settings:
Value
Service period
Setting
range
0 – 99 months
Factory
setting
12 months
6.4.8.6 Alarm priority
Changes in alarm priority should only be made if you
have special reasons for doing so and you should be
aware of the consequences. The priority of certain alarms
cannot be changed.
Alarm priority
Settings:
Value
Alarm number
Active
Priority
Air handling unit stop
Setting range
1:1 - 60:10
On/Off
Info*/A/B
On/Off
* Alarms are indicated as a flashing red LED on the hand-held
terminal, no group alarm is forwarded.
56
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.9 Log
An SD card must be fitted into the AHU's control card for the log
function to work (2 GB SD cards are installed from the factory, 8
GB SD cards can be ordered as accessories).
Log
6.4.9.1 Continuous log
The log files period can be set here. Can be selected as inactive
or day.
Logging interval
Continuous log
Day = 1 minute
Settings:
Value
Log file period
Setting
range
Inactive/Day
Factory
settings
Inactive
6.4.9.2 Log sender
The log function has a log sender function which can e-mail the
log to an optional e-mail address and/or FTP address.
Log sender
Settings:
Value
Setting
Factory
range
setting
Log sender active
On/Off
Off
Live mode
E-mail/FTP/E-mail E-mail
and FTP
Other settings can be entered in the AHU's web page.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
57
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.10 Air handling unit
6.4.10.1 Settings
Set the type of air handling unit here. The type of air
handling unit is normally preset for the unit supplied;
except the GOLD SD extract air unit which must be set
here.
N.B.! Do not change the air handling unit setting to a
type that differs from the one supplied. If you do so, the
air handling unit will not operate satisfactorily.
Air handling
unit
Settings
The air handling unit can be given a specific name (e.g. the
unit's serial number). Naming in the hand-held terminal can
only be done with digits, however on the web page the naming
can also be done with alphabetical characters. The given name
is then shown in all the images in the hand-held terminal and
web page.
The type of AHU, size of the supply air and extract air fan respectively can be viewed.
GOLD RX/PX/CX
The AHU’s fan position 1 (left-hand fan seen from the inspection
side, see illustrations) can be read and preset.
N.B.! This changes the function of the fans from supply
air to extract air and vice versa. GOLD RX size 04-120/
GOLD RX Top can be changed at the site. The other variants must not be changed from the factory setting.
GOLD RX 04-40
Fan arrangement 1
The fan position in the flow chart can be read and should be set
according to the AHU's actual configuration.
GOLD SD
The fan position, upper or lower level, can be read and should be
set according to the AHU’s actual configuration.
Settings:
Value
Type of air handling unit
GOLD RX/PX/CX
Name
Fan position 1
Flow chart, supply air fan
position
GOLD SD
Name
Flowchart fan position
Setting
range
GOLD RX/GOLD
PX/GOLD CX/
GOLD SD SA/
GOLD SD EA/
GOLD SD
SA+CX/GOLD SD
SA+EA/GOLD SD
SA+EA+CX
Optional
Extract air/
Supply air
Upper level/
Lower level
Optional
Upper level/
Lower level
Factory
setting
Type of air
handling
unit supplied, except
the GOLD
SD extract
air handling
unit
Fan pos. 1 set as extract air
(right-hand inspection side)
Fan arrangement 2
Fan pos. 1 set as extract air
(right-hand inspection side)
www.swegon.com
Fan pos. 1 set as supply air
(left-hand inspection side)
GOLD RX Top
Extract air
Lower level
Lower level
Fan pos. 1 set as supply air
(left-hand inspection side)
Outdoor air
58
Fan pos. 1 set as supply air
(left-hand inspection side)
Supply air
Fan pos. 1 set as extract air
(right-hand inspection side)
Extract air
Exhaust air
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.10.2 Fan status
The fan control speed setting can be viewed in percent of max.
speed here.
6.4.10.3 Operation time
In operation times (in days) can if applicable be viewed for fan
controls, heat exchanger/cooling recovery, preheating, extra
heating regulation sequence, Xzone heating, AHU reheating,
ReCO2 heating, extra cooling regulation sequence, Xzone cooling, AHU cooling, ReCO2 cooling, AYC heating water and AYC
cooling water.
Fan status
Operation time
6.4.10.4 Automatic functions
Start up sequence
The air handling unit has a start up sequence with a factorypreset time delay between each step as follows:
1. The damper relay is energized and opens the shut-off damper
(if installed). The heat exchanger is controlled to max. heat
recovery (not the GOLD SD without heat exchanger). The
valve for reheating opens to 40% (if installed)
Time delay: 30 seconds.
2. The extract air fan starts in the current operating mode (not
for ventilation systems with GOLD SD supply air handling unit
only)
Time delay: 60 seconds.
3. The supply air fan starts (not for ventilation systems with
GOLD SD extract air handling unit only)
Time delay: 30 seconds.
4. The reheating function is ramped up or down depending on
the heating load. Ramp time: 180 seconds. After that the
heat exchanger is ramped up or down depending on the
heating load. Ramp time: 180 seconds.
The entire start up sequence can be followed in the dashboard
image.
The start up sequence prevents the extract air fan from starting
up if the shut-off damper is closed. By first starting up the extract
air fan and the heat exchanger, you can avoid chilling the premises with supply air on a start up under cold weather conditions.
Zero point calibration
The pressure sensor of the AHU is automatically calibrated. The
calibration process takes about 70 seconds after the AHU has
stopped (a notification is shown if the AHU has not stopped).
The zero point calibration text is displayed in the hand-held terminal. The fans cannot start while calibration is in progress.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
59
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.11 Heat
6.4.11.1 Status
All the relevant values can be read here. Used for performance
checks.
Heat
6.4.11.2 Pre-heat
By preheating the outdoor air, it is possible to prevent moisture
precipitation in the AHU's outdoor air filter, to reduce the risk of
frosting in the heat exchanger and to eliminate the risk that pressure sensors and motor control systems are operating in too low
ambient temperature.
See also the Pre-heat function guide for more detailed information.
Status
Pre-heat
Settings:
Value
Setting
range
Pre-heat
On/Off
Pre-heat set point
-40 – +40°C
Periodic operation of pump On/Off
Periodic operation of valve On/Off
Periodic operation interval 0-168 hrs.
Periodic operation period
0-60 min.
Alarm input, function
Inactive/Alarm
on open contact/
Alarm on closed
contact/Contactor
function
60
www.swegon.com
Factory
setting
Off
5°C
On
On
24 hrs.
3 min.
Inactive
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.11.3 Extra regulation sequence
Used for extra regulation functions controlled by a 0-10 V (10-0
V) signal with ordinary temperature regulation sequence.
Extra regulation sequence
The function can be used for utilising existing heating or cooling
sources, such as from a chiller. The function can also be used for
an extra air heater or air cooler.
It can also be used for controlling dampers for recirculation, if
required. In these cases, an inverted 10-0 V output is used.
Recirculation control is used for the TBBD mixing section (GOLD
SD only) The 10-0 V inverted output should be in the On position.
The maximum output signal can be limited from 100% down to
0 %.
The output signal of the extra regulation sequence is controlled
from the TBIQ-3-2 IQlogic+ module accessory, see separate installation instructions.
When the SMART Link DX function is selected, the extra regulation sequence is automatically activated. The extra regulation
sequence cannot then be used for any other functionality. An
IQlogic+ module is not required (alarm for missing module is
blocked).
The extra regulation sequence makes it possible to control two
air heaters at the same time in the following combinations:
water - electricity, water - water, electricity - electricity (Season
heat, see also Section 6.4.11.7). The air heater for hot water is
available without or without frost guard function.
When the output of the first air heater is not sufficient, the
second is automatically brought into the sequence.
A start-up sequence, frost guard function, pump control, postcooling for electric air heater and other functionality are available.
For the start-up sequence, frost guard function, periodic operation and post-cooling, the same settings are used as for regular
reheating.
Settings:
Value
Setting
range
Extra regulation sequence
Inactive/Heat/Cool/
Heat and cool
Inverted output 10-0V
On/Off
Recirculation control
On/Off
Max. output signal
0-100%
Periodic operation of pump On/Off
Periodic operation of valve On/Off
Periodic operation interval 0-168 hrs.
Periodic operation period
0-60 min.
Alarm input, function
Inactive/Alarm
on open contact/
Alarm on closed
contact/Contactor
function
Factory
setting
Inactive
Off
Off
100%
On
On
24 hrs.
3 min.
Inactive
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
61
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.11.4 Reheat
The air heater is equipped with a quick-fit connector for connection to the AHU's control unit which automatically senses the
type of air heater in use.
Reheat
Air heater for hot water
When there is a reheating load, and the function Periodic operation of pump or of pump+valve is selected , the relay output is
activated (control unit terminals 20-21) and this starts the circulation pump of the air heater.
If the outdoor temperature is low (colder than +12 °C), the
pump output contact is continuously activated. During other
times, the pump output contact is activated 3 min./day (factory
setting) for periodic operation the circulation pump.
Settings:
Value
Air heater for hot water
Periodic operation of pump
Periodic operation of valve
Periodic operation interval
Periodic operation period
Setting
range
Factory
setting
On/Off
On/Off
0-168 hrs.
0-60 min.
On
On
24 hrs.
3 min.
Electric air heater
When there is a reheating load, the relay output is activated
(control unit terminals 20-21).
The relay output can be used for indicating or blocking the
external function.
6.4.11.5 Xzone
The Xzone temperature control function is designed for controlling one extra temperature zone via the ventilation system.
Xzone
Xzone can be used for all types of air handling units, and both
reheating and cooling can be controlled in the extra zone.
See also the Xzone function guide for more detailed information.
Settings:
Value
Xzone
Air heater for hot water
Periodic operation of pump
Periodic operation of valve
Periodic operation interval
Periodic operation period
Alarm input, function
62
www.swegon.com
Setting
range
On/Off
Factory
setting
Off
On/Off
On/Off
0-168 hrs.
0-60 min.
Inactive/Alarm
on open contact/
Alarm on closed
contact/Contactor
function
On
On
24 hrs.
3 min.
Inactive
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.11.6 Electric air heater
Electric air heater
If the electric air heater has been in operation, the air heater is
post-cooled for about 3 minutes (factory setting) when stop has
been activated.
The text “After cool” appears in the hand-held terminal.
Settings:
Value
After cool
Setting
range
1 - 25 min
Factory
setting
3 min.
6.4.11.7 Season Heat
Season Heat
The Season Heat function involves that the extra regulation
sequence functions is activated. See Section 6.4.11.3.
When both the standard function for reheating and the extra
heating sequence are activated, it is possible to alternate
between these via a digital input or communication.
Example: Hot water is only available in the winter. In the summer,
any reheating load is backed up by an electric air heater. Changeover can be done manually or via external thermostat, external
clock function or the like.
Settings:
Value
Season Heat
Extra reg. seq.
enabled
(manual only)
Setting range
Inactive/Extra reg.
seq. closed contact/
Extra reg. seq. open
contact/Extra reg.
seq. Manual 1)
On/Off 2)
Factory setting
Inactive
Off
Extra regulation sequence closed contact = When the contact
is closed, only the standard reheating function is active. When
the contact is opened a changeover to extra heating regulation
sequence occurs.
Extra regulation sequence open contact = When the contact
is open, only the standard reheating function is active. When
the contact is closed, a changeover to extra heating regulation
sequence occurs.
1)
Extra regulation sequence Manual = Changeover is done in the
hand-held terminal or on the AHU's web page.
2)
Extra regulation sequence in Off position involves that the
standard function for reheating is active and in the On positin a
changeover to extra regulation sequence occurs.
6.4.11.8 Automatic functions
Frost guard function, air heater for water
The frost guard function is always active if the connected air
heater for hot water has been supplied by Swegon.
The function activates a heating device that keeps the temperature in the coil at 13 °C while the air handling unit is operating and 25 °C in the coil when the unit is stopped. An alarm is
initiated and stops the AHU if the temperature sensor senses a
temperature below 7 °C.
Capacity reduction of the electric air heater
Only in combination with Swegon's electric air heater.
A min. permissible air velocity of 2.0 m/s is required for preventing the electric heating elements from becoming overheated
when they are generating full heating output.
If the air handling unit supply airflow drops below the value
that corresponds to an air velocity of 2.0 m/s across the heat
exchanger, the heating output of the air heater will be automatically reduced.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
63
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.12 Cool
6.4.12.1 Status
All the relevant values can be read here. Used for performance
checks.
6.4.12.2 Extra regulation sequence
Used for extra regulation functions controlled by a 0-10 V (10-0
V) signal with ordinary temperature regulation sequence.
The function can be used for utilizing existing heating or cooling
sources, such as from a chiller. The function can also be used for
an extra air heater or air cooler.
It can also be used for controlling dampers for recirculation, if
required. In these cases, an inverted 10-0 V output is used.
Cool
Status
Extra regulation
sequence
Recirculation control is used for the TBBD mixing section (GOLD
SD only) The 10-0 V inverted output should be in the On position.
The maximum output signal can be limited from 100% down to
0 %.
The output signal of the extra regulation sequence is controlled
from the TBIQ-3-2 IQlogic+ module accessory, see separate installation instructions.
When the SMART Link DX function is selected, the extra regulation sequence is automatically activated. The extra regulation
sequence cannot then be used for any other functionality. An
IQlogic+ module is not required (alarm for missing module is
blocked).
Settings:
Value
Setting
range
Extra regulation sequence
Inactive/Heat/Cool/
Heat and cool
Output inverse 10-0V
On/Off
Recirculation control
On/Off
Max. output signal
0-100%
Periodic operation of pump On/Off
Periodic operation of valve On/Off
Periodic operation interval 0-168 hrs.
Periodic operation period
0-60 min.
Alarm input, function
Inactive/Alarm
on open contact/
Alarm on closed
contact/Contactor
function
64
www.swegon.com
Factory
setting
Inactive
Off
Off
100%
On
On
24 hrs.
3 min.
Inactive
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.12.3 Cool
The valve actuator of the air cooler for water is equipped with
a quick-fit connector for connection to the AHU's control unit
which automatically activates the cooling function.
Cool
1-step
Used if cooling in one step is connected. The cooling controller
of the AHU regulates the cooling output according to the cooling
load, 0-100 %. The cooling relay is energised when the cooling
load exceeds 5 % and is de-energised when the cooling load is
below 2 %.
2-step
Used when cooling in 2 steps is connected. The cooling controller of the AHU regulates the cooling output according to the
cooling load, 0-100 %.
Cooling relay 1 is energised when the cooling load exceeds 5
% and is de-energised when the cooling load is less than 2 %.
Cooling relay 2 is energised when the cooling load exceeds 55 %
and is de-energised when the cooling load is less than 50 %.
3-step, binary
Used when cooling with two inputs controlled with three binary
steps is connected. The cooling controller of the AHU regulates
the cooling output according to the cooling load, 0-100 %.
On an increasing cooling load:
Cooling relay 1 is energised when the cooling load is above 5
% and is de-energised when the cooling load is between 40-70
%. Cooling relay 2 is energised when the cooling load is above
40 %. Cooling relay 1 is energised again (together with cooling
relay 2) when the cooling load is above 70%.
On a decreasing cooling load:
Cooling relay 1 is deenergised when cooling load is below 60 %,
it is energised again when cooling load is below 30 % and is deenergised again when cooling load is below 2 %. Cooling relay 2
is de-energised when cooling load is below 30 %.
Settings:
Value
DX air cooler
Cooling
Air cooler for water
Periodic operation of pump 1
Periodic operation of pump 2
Periodic operation of valve
Periodic operation interval
Periodic operation period
Setting
range
Factory
setting
Inactive/1 step/2
steps/3 steps, binary
Inactive
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
0-168 hrs.
0-60 min.
On
On
On
24 hrs.
3 min.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
65
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.12.4 Xzone
The Xzone temperature control function is designed for controlling one extra temperature zone via the ventilation system.
Xzone
Xzone can be used for all types of air handling units, and both
reheating and cooling can be controlled in the extra zone.
See also the Xzone function guide for more detailed information.
Settings:
Value
DX air cooler
Cooling
Air cooler for water
Periodic operation of pump 1
Periodic operation of pump 2
Periodic operation of valve
Periodic operation interval
Periodic operation period
Alarm input 1, function
Alarm input 2, function
Setting
range
Factory
setting
Inactive/1 step/2
steps/3 steps,
binary
Inactive
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
0-168 hrs.
0-60 min.
Inactive/Alarm
on open contact/
Alarm on closed
contact/Contactor
function
Inactive/Alarm
on open contact/
Alarm on closed
contact/Contactor
function
On
On
On
24 hrs.
3 min.
Inactive
Inactive
6.4.12.5 COOL DX
COOL DX - Economy (without heat exchanger)
COOL DX
Used when the COOL DX chiller is connected. Both cooling relays
of the air handling unit operate in parallel with the corresponding relay on the IQlogic+ module in the COOL DX chiller.
COOL DX - Comfort
Used when the COOL DX chiller is connected. The heat
exchanger in the AHU operates in sequence with the cooling unit
to even out the supply air temperature.
COOL DX Top
Used when the COOL DX Top chiller is connected. Both cooling
relays of the air handling unit operate in parallel with the corresponding relay on the IQlogic+ module in the COOL DX chiller.
Settings:
Value
COOL DX
66
Setting
range
Inactive/Economy/
Comfort/COOL DX Top
www.swegon.com
Factory
setting
Inactive
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.12.6 Delay time
Restart time is computed from when the compressor starts until
it is permitted to start again.
Delay time
Step switch time is the time delay between two steps.
Stop/start time is computed from when the compressor stops
until it is permitted to start again.
Settings:
Value
Restart time
Step switch time
Stop/start time
Setting
range
0-20 min.
0-15 min.
0-15 min.
Factory
setting
5 min.
5 min.
5 min.
6.4.12.7 Outdoor air limits
Provision is available for setting an outdoor temperature-related
blocking function in 3 steps. If the outdoor temperature is below
each step limit, the function of the cooling relays will be blocked.
The function is used for preventing the relevant compressors
from being switched on and off too many times.
Outdoor air limits
Settings:
Value
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Setting
range
0 - 30°C
0 - 30°C
0 - 30°C
Factory
setting
15°C
18°C
20°C
6.4.12.8 Airflow limits
The cooling function is blocked if the supply or extract airflows
for are lower than the preset limit.
If the airflow limit function is not of immediate interest, both
flow limits are set to 0.
Air flow limits
Settings:
Value
Supply air
Setting
range
0 - Max. flow
Extract air
0 - Max. flow
Factory
setting
25% of max. airflow
for air handling unit
25% of max. airflow
for air handling unit
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
67
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.13 Heat/Cool recovery
6.4.13.1 Status
All the relevant values can be read here. Used for performance
checks.
Heat/Cool
recovery
Status
6.4.13.2 Carry over control
If the fans are generating low airflows, the rotary heat
exchanger is decelerated to an appropriate speed to
ensure a correct purging airflow through the heat
exchanger.
Carry over control
Settings:
Value
Carry over control
68
www.swegon.com
Setting
range
On/Off
Factory
setting
Off
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.13.3 Defrost
In environments where the extract air can occasionally
be humid, the defrosting function can be activated to
protect the heat exchanger from frosting. The function continuously monitors the condition of the heat
exchanger rotor to prevent it from becoming clogged due
to condensate that has frozen inside the exchanger.
Defrost
The function requires a separate pressure sensor (preset for heat
exchanger defrosting) wired to the control unit inputs for external BUS communication and connected to the AHU pressure
measurement tappings. See special installation instruction for the
TBLZ-1-23-aa pressure sensor.
The pressure drop across the rotor must then be calibrated to
establish a reference pressure drop for monitoring purposes.
Calibration is put into effect by setting Calibration to the On
position.
When the defrosting function is activated the pressure drop
across the heat exchanger is continuously measured and the
reading is compared with the calibration reading. If the pressure
drop exceeds the preset limit value, a defrosting sequence is
implemented in which the rotor speed is gradually ramped down
(ramp time max. 4 minutes) to the speed at which the pressure
drop across the heat exchanger decreases to half of the preset
limit value. The lowest permissible speed of the rotor is 0.5 rpm.
During the defrosting process, the warm extract air thaws any
possible ice that has formed on surfaces. A delay time of 4 minutes gives the heat exchanger time to dry, before the rotor once
again is ramped up (ramp time max. 4 minutes) to its ordinary
speed.
The defrosting operates for a max permissible period of 30
minutes. If the pressure drop has not decreased within that max
permissible period after six tries during a 24-hour period, an
alarm will be initiated.
Extract air
Connection principle for the defrosting function with
separate pressure sensor.
Note that the heat exchanger performs less efficiently while
defrosting is in progress and that the supply air temperature will
also drop downstream of the heat exchanger.
Settings:
Value
Defrost
Defrost limit value
Calibration
Setting
range
On/Off
30 - 100 Pa
On/Off
Factory
setting
Off
50 Pa
Off
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
69
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.13.4 Automatic functions
GOLD RX (rotary heat exchanger)
GOLD PX (plate heat exchanger)
Purging function
Purging is an automatic function that prevents the rotary heat
exchanger from standing still in the same position for a longer
period when no heating is necessary.
Anti-frost protection
In cold weather, and when the extract air is humid, there is risk
of frosting in the plate heat exchanger. The GOLD PX is equipped
with anti-frost protection.
Purging operation is activated when the AHU is operating but
the heat exchanger rotor is not rotating. The heat exchanger
rotor then rotates for 10 seconds every 10 minutes to purge its
surfaces clean of impurities.
The temperature inside the heat exchanger’s "cold corner" and
the humidity in the extract air are measured.
Calculation of the efficiency
The efficiency is calculated and displayed (0 – 100%).
Taking the humidity into consideration, the control system calculates the lowest permissible temperature without risk of frosting
inside the heat exchanger. The bypass damper is then regulated
to prevent the air from dropping below this temperature.
Cooling recovery
Cooling recovery is an automatic function that helps the air handling unit on a cooling load and high outdoor air temperature
to utilize the relative "cooling energy" that can be indoors. The
heat exchanger rotates at max. speed and in this way recovers
the relative cooling energy or chilliness in the extract air.
The conditions for this function to be activated are that there is a
cooling demand and that the outdoor temperature is 1 °C higher
than the extract air. The function stops when the cooling load
ceases to exist or when the outdoor temperature is the same as
that of the extract air.
Overtime heat exchanger operation
If the AHU stops, the heat exchanger automatically continues to
recover heat for about 1 minute.
It takes a little time for the fans to stop rotating after a stop has
been ordered and this prevents the supply air from chilling the
premises.
GOLD CX/SD (coil heat exchanger)
Pump control, coil heat exchanger
The pump of the pipework package starts when heat recovery is
needed. If heat recovery is not needed for more than 24 hours,
the pump is exercised once a day.
Anti-frost protection
In cold weather, and if the extract air is humid, there is risk of
frosting in the coil heat exchanger. The GOLD CX/SD is equipped
with anti-frosting protection.
The temperature of the liquid circulated to the extract air coil and
the humidity in the extract air are measured.
Taking the humidity into consideration, the control system
calculates the lowest permissible temperature without risk of
frosting inside the coil. The valve in the pipework package is then
regulated to prevent the circulated liquid from dropping below
this temperature.
70
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.14 SMART Link
The SMART Link function is intended for use for optimum control of the temperature and operation as well as the reading of
alarms and the values for a Swegon chiller/heat pump.
For more information concerning waterborne heat pumps/chillers, see the Guide to the SMART Link/AQUA Link Functions.
SMART Link
For more information concerning DX heat pumps/chillers (Celest+
LE), see the Guide to the SMART Link DX (GOLD RX only) Functions.
Settings:
Value
Type of unit
Water
Heated water set point
Heated water diff
Chilled water set point
Chilled water diff
Limit, outdoor temperature
Optimize
Optimizing cooling
regulation speed
Optimizing heating
regulation speed
Valve limit, lower
Valve limit, upper
Delay
AQUA Link
Pump alarm
DX
Number of connected units
(Celest+)
Length of period, comfort
mode
Defrost delay
Dead band supply air temp.
Stabilization time
Setting
range
Inactive/
Water, heat
pump/
Water, chiller/
Water, reversible/
DX, heat pump/
DX, chiller/
DX, reversible
Factory
setting
Inactive
10 - 80°C 1)
1 - 10 K
0 - 20°C 1)
1 - 10 K
-50 – +50°C
On/Off
0.01 - 6.00 K/min
40°C
3K
12°C
2K
-30°C
Off
0.3 K/min
0.01 - 6.00 K/min 0.3 K/min
5 - 90%
70 - 100%
30 - 3200
On/Off
Inactive/Alarm on
closed contact/
Alarm on open
contact/Contactor function
75
95
60
Off
Inactive
1-4
1
1 - 10,000 sec.
1200 s
5 - 900 s
0,0 - 5,0K
60 - 600 s
180 s
1,0K
240 s
Min. and max. limited by preset values in the chiller/heat
pump..
1)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
71
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.15 Humidity
If the functions Dehumidifying regulation and Humidifying are
activated at the same time, Dehumidifying regulation has priority and the possible settings for Humidifying are limited to being
the same or lower than the setting for Dehumidifying regulation.
There is a delay of 5 minutes between Dehumidifying regulation
having stopped and Humidifying starting up (ande vice versa).
Humidity
6.4.15.1 Status
All the relevant values can be read here. Used for performance
checks.
6.4.15.2 Humidifying
Status
Humidifying
Evaporative humidification (On/Off)
This function is suitable together with an evaporative humidifier
(not Swegon).
The function requires the TBIQ-3-1 IQlogic+ module accessory
and one TBLZ-31-2 humidity sensor. See separate installation
instructions. Install the humidity sensor in the extract air duct (or
in the premises), see drawing.
The humidity in the extract air duct (the premises) is regulated
between adjustable start and stop limits.
Steam humidification (0 - 10V)
The function is appropriate for operation together with a steam
humidifier (not Swegon) and is a variable control system via a
0-10 V control signal, as well as a contact function which interlocks the humidifier if the air handling unit stops, if Summer
night cool is used or if the humidity in the extract air exceeds the
set point by more than 10%.
The function requires the following accessories: TBIQ-3-1 IQlogic
Plus module and one TBLZ-31-2 humidity sensor (for extract
air regulation) or two TBLZ-31-1/2 humidity sensors (for supply
air regulation), see separate installation instructions. Install the
humidity sensors in the extract air duct and the supply air duct
respectively. See drawing.
Example,
steam humidification
TBLZ-1-31-2
Humidity sensor, extract air
The function keeps the humidity level constant in the extract air
duct (the premises) by regulating the humidity in the supply air.
In order to prevent the humidity in the supply air from being too
high, it is restricted to a maximum limit.
Alternatively the humidity in the supply air duct can be kept constant by selecting a regulating humidity sensor in the supply air.
The set point cannot be set higher than the max limit. If the
dehumidification function is activated, the max limit cannot be
set higher than the set point for dehumidification.
TBLZ-1-31-1
Humidity sensor, supply air
Settings:
Value
Humidifying
Regulation sensor
Evaporative
Start
Stop
Steam
Set point
Max. supply air
72
www.swegon.com
Setting
range
Inactive/On/Off/
0-10V
Supply air/Extract air
Factory
setting
Inactive
10 - 95%RH
10 - 95%RH
40%RH
45%RH
10 - 95%RH
10 - 95%RH
30%RH
80%RH
Supply air
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.15.3 Dehumidifying
The function is intended for dehumidifying the supply air in order
to prevent condensation in the supply air duct or in connected air
conditioning products.
Dehumidifying
The dehumidification regulation function controls the humidity
in the supply air duct or the extract air duct by means of an air
cooler and an air heater for reheating.
The function requires that an air cooler be mounted upstream of
the air heater in the supply air duct. See the example to the right.
Install a TBLZ-1-31-1 humidity sensor in the supply air duct for
controlling the humidity there. Install a TBLZ-1-31-2 humidity
sensor in the extract air duct for controlling the humidity there.
Connect the sensor to the AHU. See separate installation instructions.
Example: Dehumidification regulation
TBLZ-1-31-2 Humidity sensor
Temperature
sensor, supply air
Cooling energy is emitted to condense the moisture in the supply
airflow, which then is heated to the desired supply air temperature. This causes a reduction in the moisture content of the
supply air.
The cooling unit used must be sized so that the temperature of
the supply air will be below the dew point, otherwise no condensation will arise and no dehumidification will occur.
TBLZ-1-31-1 Humidity sensor
Settings:
Value
Dehumidification
Supply air - relative humidity
Extract air - relative humidity
Setting
range
Inactive/Supply
air/Extract air
10-90%RH
10-90%RH
Factory
settings
Inactive
50%RH
50%RH
6.4.15.4 Humidifier alarm
The alarm input can be selected to closed circuit, open circuit or
contactor function.
Humidifier alarm
Settings:
Value
Alarm input
Setting
range
Inactive/Closed circuit/Open
circuit/Contactor function 1)
Factory
setting
Inactive
Closed circuit involves closing the circuit in order to initiate an
alarm. Open circuit involves opening the circuit in order to initiate an alarm. Contactor function involves the use of an auxiliary
contact from a contactor, which controls the humidifier. The aux.
contact is connected to the alarm input.
1)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
73
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.16 ReCO2
The ReCO2 function is designed for ensuring the correct air quality or air temperature, by means of recirculating extract air and
minimizing the inflow of outdoor air.
The function can be used in ventilation systems in which recirculated air intermixture is acceptable.
ReCO2
The function presupposes that the outdoor air damper and the
damper in the air recirculation section are equipped with modulating damper actuators.
Lower outdoor air and exhaust air flows as well as lower extract
air fan speed enable the unit to consume less power. A separate
air quality sensor continuously measures the air quality of the
ventilation system.
Exhaust air
Extract air
Outdoor air
Supply air
The pressure drop across the rotor must then be calibrated to
establish a reference pressure drop for the function. Calibration
is put into effect by setting Calibration to the On position.
For more information, see the ReCO2 function guide.
Settings:
Value
Regulation mode
CO2 mode
Temperature mode
CO2
CO2, set point
Min. outdoor air
Setting
range
Factory
setting
Inactive/CO2/
CO2 and air flow
boost
Inactive/Heat
sequence/Cool
sequence/Heat and
cool sequence
Inactive
Outdoor airflow kept constant by pressure sensor
Inactive
When the recirculation damper opens the extract air fan speed
decreases and vice versa.
0 - 100%
50%
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
Off
1)
Min. exhaust air
1)
Calibration
Temperature
Min. outdoor air
On/Off
Min. exhaust air
1)
Calibration
On/Off
1)
Pressure sensor for outdoor air
measurement
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
25% of max.
airflow for air
handling unit
Off
The setting range is the same as the AHU's min. - max. settings.
1)
74
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.17 All Year Comfort
The All Year Comfort function controls, via control valves, the
supply flow temperature to the comfort modules, cooling beams,
perimeter wall units, etc. The water temperature is measured by
two strap-on temperature sensors mounted on the water pipe of
each circuit.
All Year
Comfort
All Year Comfort has functions for outdoor compensation, room
compensation, night compensation, dew point compensation as
well as the monitoring and exercising of pumps and valves.
For more information, see the All Year Comfort function guide.
Settings:
Value
Function
Chilled water
Chilled water 1)
Outdoor temp compensation
Outdoor temp X1
Outdoor temp X2
Outdoor temp X3
Outdoor temp X4
Chilled water temp Y1
Chilled water temp Y2
Chilled water temp Y3
Chilled water temp Y4
Outdoor temp for pump start
Outdoor temp for pump stop
Room temp compensation
Room temp. set point
Room temp. P-band
Room comp. night block
Setting
range
Inactive/Cooling
water/Heating
water/
Cooling water
and heating
water
Factory
setting
Inactive
5 - 30°C
14°C
On/Off
Off
-40 – +40°C
10°C
-40 – +40°C
20°C
-40 – +40°C
25°C
-40 – +40°C
30°C
5 – 30°C
22°C
5 – 30°C
18°C
5 – 30°C
14°C
5 – 30°C
12°C
-40 - +40°C
10°C
-40 - +40°C 7°C
On/Off
Off
0 - 40°C
21°C
1 - 10 K
5K
On/Off
Off
Night compensation
Night reduction
Time channel 1/2 start of night
Time channel 1/2 end of night
Time channel 1/2 period
On/Off
0 - 10 K
00:00 - 23:59
00:00 - 23:59
Inactive/
Monday/
Tuesday/
Wednesday/
Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Mon - Fri/Mon
- Sun/
Sat - Sun
Dew point compensation
On/Off
Air flow compensation
On/Off
Periodic operation pump
On/Off
Periodic operation valve exercising On/Off
Periodic operation interval
0-168 hrs.
Periodic operation period
0-60 min.
Pump alarm
Inactive/Alarm
on closed contact/Alarm on
open contact/
Contactor function
Valve alarm
On/Off
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Off
2K
00:00
00:00
Inactive
Off
Off
On
Off
24 hrs.
3 min.
Inactive
Heated water
Heated water1)
Outdoor temp compensation
Outdoor temp X1
Outdoor temp X2
Outdoor temp X3
Outdoor temp X4
Heated water temp Y1
Heated water temp Y2
Heated water temperatue Y3
Heated water temp Y4
Outdoor temp for pump start
Outdoor temp for pump stop
Room temp compensation
Room temp. set point
Room temp. P-band
Room comp. night block
Night compensation
Night reduction
Time channel 1/2 start of night
Time channel 1/2 end of night
Time channel 1/2 period
10 - 80°C
On/Off
-40 – +40°C
-40 – +40°C
-40 – +40°C
-40 – +40°C
10 – 80°C
10 – 80°C
10 – 80°C
10 – 80°C
-40 - +40°C
-40 - +40°C
On/Off
0 - 40°C
1 - 10 K
On/Off
On/Off
0 – -10 K
00:00 - 23:59
00:00 - 23:59
Inactive/
Monday/
Tuesday/
Wednesday/
Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday
Mon - Fri/Mon
- Sun/
Sat - Sun
Air flow compensation
On/Off
Periodic operation pump
On/Off
Periodic operation valve exercising On/Off
Periodic operation interval
0-168 hrs.
Periodic operation period
0-60 min.
Pump alarm
Inactive/Alarm
on closed contact/Alarm on
open contact/
Contactor function
Valve alarm
On/Off
30°C
Off
-20°C
0°C
5°C
15°C
40°C
30°C
20°C
15°C
15°C
18°C
Off
21°C
5K
Off
Off
-2 K
00:00
00:00
Inactive
Off
On
Off
24 hrs.
3 min.
Inactive
Off
Omitted if the outdoor temperature compensation
is selected.
1)
Off
www.swegon.com
75
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.18 MIRU Control
Up to ten power roof ventilators with MIRU Control equipment
can be connected to one GOLD air handling unit by means of
bus communication.
If one or several power roof ventilator(s) is/are stopped via the
control panel on the corresponding MIRU Control, the power
roof ventilator(s) cannot be started via the GOLD unit hand-held
terminal.
MIRU Control
The settings in the hand-held micro terminal of the GOLD unit
override the settings in the MIRU Control’s control panel.
It is possible in the hand-held micro terminal to select whether
the power roof ventilator should be controlled in parallel with
the GOLD unit, and whether it should follow the low-speed/
high-speed operating modes of the air handling unit.
The balanced ventilation function can be used if the power
roof ventilators are used for variable flow. It is then possible to
select which power roof ventilator(s) is/are to be included in the
function.
In the case of balanced extract air, all the airflows of the activated power roof ventilators are added together. The extract
airflow in the GOLD unit is decreased by the corresponding
volume. In this way the supply airflow will be the same as the
total extract airflow and balanced ventilation will be achieved
inside the building.
In the case of balanced supply air, all the airflows of the activated power roof ventilators are added together. The supply
airflow in the GOLD unit is increased by the corresponding
volume. In this way the supply airflow will be the same as the
total extract airflow and balanced ventilation will be achieved
inside the building.
The function presupposes that pressure sensors for flow measurement and possible pressure regulation are connected to
MIRO Control.
All the time channels available in MIRU Control can be set separately for each connected power roof ventilator via the GOLD
unit hand-held micro terminal. For a description of the function,
see the separate Guide to the MIRU Control Functions.
Depending on the function selected in MIRU Control, it is possible to set the desired set point for pressure or flow, low speed
and high speed, in the GOLD unit hand-held micro terminal.
For a description of the function, see the separate Guide to the
MIRU Control Functions.
76
www.swegon.com
Settings:
Value
Setting
range
Fan numbers 1 – 10,
function
Inactive/Parallel start/
Parallel low speed/high
speed/Parallel start and
low speed/high speed
Fan numbers 1 – 10,
Inactive/Supply air/Exbalance function
tract air
Fans 1 – 10 low speed 0 – 750 Pa
Fans 1 – 10 low speed 1) m3/s
Fans 1 – 10 high speed 0 – 750 Pa
Fans 1 – 10 high speed 1) m3/s
Fans 1 – 10, channel
Inactive
1 – 4 action
Low speed, Mon., Low
speed
Tue., low speed Wed.,
etc.
Low speed, Mon. – Fri.
Low speed, Sat. – Sun.
Low speed, Mon. –
Sun.
High speed Mon., High
speed Tue., High speed
Wed., etc.
High speed, Mon. – Fri.
High speed, Sat. – Sun.
High speed, Mon. –
Sun.
Start time
00:00-00:00
Stop time
00:00-00:00
Factory
setting
Inactive
Inactive
100
0
200
0
Inactive
00:00
00:00
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.19 Inputs/Outputs
Can for example be used if the air handling unit will be controlled/monitored via microprocessor substation or a PLC system.
External operation requires the TBIQ-3-2 IQlogic+ module accessory. See separate installation instructions.
Inputs/Outputs
Settings:
Value
External operation
module 3/6
Digital output 1/2
mode
Digital input 1/2
Analogue input 1
Analogue input 2
Analogue input
1/2
Setting
range
Factory
setting
1)
Inactive/Air handling unit in
operation/Air handling unit in
auto operation/ Air handling
unit in manual operation/Air
handling unit in low speed
operation/Air handling unit
in high speed operation/A
alarm/B alarm/Damper
relay/Heat exchanger/Heat
exchanger defrost/Reheat/
Reheating power reduction/
Heating Boost/Morning Boost/
Intermittent night heat/Airflow down regulation/Extra
reg. sequence heat/Extra reg.
sequence cool/Cooling/Cooling Boost/Summer night cool/
Supply air fan in operation/
Extract air fan in operation
Inactive/Alarm reset/Stop AYC Inactive
heated water/Stop AYC chilled
water
Indicates present supply
airflow, from 0 to air handling
unit’s max. speed (%)
Indicates present extract
airflow, from 0 to air handling
unit’s max. speed (%)
2)
Inactive/Set point displacement/Set point displacement,
supply air/Set point displacement, extract air
1)
Module 3, digital output 1 = Low speed
Module 3, digital output 2 = High speed
Module 6, digital output 1 = A alarm
Module 6, digital output 2 = B alarm
2)
Module 3, analogue input 1 = Set point displacement,
supply air
Module 3, analogue input 2 = Set point displacement,
extract air
Module 6, analogue input 1 = Set point displacement
Module 6, analogue input 2 = Inactive
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
77
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.20 Communication
The potential for communication and monitoring is integrated as standard into the AHU. The AHU is ready to be
connected via EIA-485. For connection and wiring to the
AHU, see Section 10.5 Wiring to terminals.
Communication can also be established via Ethernet
without software other than an ordinary web browser
such as Internet Explorer.
Communication
Further information about interfaces, protocols and configuration is available at www.swegon.se (com).
6.4.20.1 External Port B
For communication with network. Specify protocol and settings
for Ethernet.
External Port B
Settings:
Value
DHCP
IP address
(static or dynamic)
Net mask
Default GATEWAY
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
MAC address
Setting range
On/Off
Factory setting
Off
10.200.1.1
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Not adjustable
6.4.20.2 Wireless LAN
The AHU's control unit is, as standard, equipped with Wi-Fi function and can be connected to e.g. a wireless hand-held terminal
(accessory), portable computer or smart phone.
Wireless LAN
The password can, via the hand-held terminal, be changed to an
optional combination of digits. The password and the SSID can
also be entered in alphabetical form on the AHU's web page.
To connect to a portable computer or smart phone, note the
settings on SSID, password and IP address. Activate Wi-Fi in the
portable computer or smart phone and search for the wireless
network (with the same name as the SSID). Connect by entering
the password.
Open your web browser and enter IP address (10.0.0.1) in the
address field. To log on, write your user name (local or installation), and enter the password (local = 0000, installation = 1111,
factory setting).
Settings:
Value
Wireless LAN
SSID
Password (WPA2-PSK)
IP address
Net mask
MAC address
Channel (frequency
band)
1)
Setting range
On/Off
Optional
1)
Not adjustable
Not adjustable
Not adjustable
5 - 11
Factory setting
Off
GOLD
123456789
10.0.0.1
255.255.255.0
Not adjustable
5
Certain smart phones require at least six characters.
78
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.20.3 E-mail
You can select whether the AHU shall handle outgoing e-mail
here.
E-mail
The settings can be entered on the AHU web page. See separate
instructions.
Settings:
Value
SMTP server
SMTP server
SMTP port number
SMTP username
SMTP password
Encryption
E-mail sender
E-mail reply path
Setting
range
External/Internal
Optional address
Factory
setting
External
Optional, to be entered on
the web page
Optional, to be entered on
the web page
On/Off
Optional, to be entered on
the web page
Optional, to be entered on
the web page
25
Off
6.4.20.4 EIA-485
EIA-485
Specify protocol and settings for EIA-485.
Settings:
Value
Protocol
Baud rate
Parity
Stopbits
Modbus ID/
Metasys ID/PLA
ELA
Shortest
feedback delay
Setting range
Inactive/Modbus/EXOline/
Metasys N2 Open/LON
4800/9600/19200/38400
None/Even/Odd
1/2
1 - 247
Factory setting
Modbus
1-255
0 - 100 ms
1
0 ms
9600
None
2
1
6.4.20.5 Modbus TCP
Modbus TCP
Specify settings for Modbus TCP.
Settings:
Value
Port number
Approved client IP address
Approved client netmask
Factory setting
502
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
6.4.20.6 BACnet IP
BACnet IP
Enter the BACnet IP settings.
Settings:
Value
Network number Ext. B
Internal network number A
Device ID
Port number
Factory setting
0
0
0
47808
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
79
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.20.7 EXOline TCP
EXOline TCP
EXOline can be activated and enter the port number.
Settings:
Value
Setting
range
Port number
PLA
ELA
1 - 247
1-255
Factory
setting
26486
1
1
6.4.20.8 Operation level communication
It is possible to change the operation level communication here.
Settings:
Value
Operation level
communication
80
Setting range
Inactive/Total stop/Low
speed/High speed/Normal
stop/ Extended normal
stop
www.swegon.com
Operation level
ommunication
Factory setting
Inactive
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.21 Base setting
Used for saving, loading and restoring the settings.
Date and time for the latest saved backup copy can be viewed.
The AHU's settings/communication settings are saved/loaded to/
from the control unit's internal memory or external SD circuit
card that can be inserted into the control unit.
Base setting
The AHU settings involve all settings except communication settings.
Communication settings involve all settings (except AHU settings).
Factory reset and Reset air handling settings, means restoring
all the settings except communication settings and calibrated
values.
Factory reset and Reset air handling and communication settings,
means restoring all the settings except calibrated values.
Total Factory reset means restoring all the settings. Note
that even the calibrated values on the pressure sensor,
etc., will be restored.
Settings:
Value
Air handling settings
Export air handling settings
Import air handling settings
Communication
settings
Export communication
settings
Import communication
settings
Factory reset
Alternative
Export to local backup/Export to
SD card
Import from local backup/Import
from SD card
Export to local backup/Export to
SD card
Import from local backup/Import
from SD card
Reset air handling settings/Reset
air handling and communication
settings/Total Factory reset
6.4.22. Users
The requirements for password can be activated here under User
level (local). The password is always 0000.
Settings:
Value
Requirements for user password
Users
Setting
range
On/Off
Factory
setting
Off
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
IQnavigator user
www.swegon.com
81
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.23 Manual test
NB! Manual test running can cause indoor comfort problems. There is also risk of overloading the system. The
responsibility for discomfort and overload rests totally on
the person who activates the function.
Manual test
When you enter manual test, you must select a safe mode or
live mode. Safe mode involves stopping the AHU and being able
to run each installed function separately or together. In the safe
mode the heat exchanger is oversteered in relation to the fan
speed. Live mode involves permitting the AHU to continue to
operate in the normal operating mode and installed functions
can be influenced manually. In this live mode the heat exchanger
is not oversteered in relation to the fan speed.
Manual test operation can take place for testing the inputs and
outputs, fans and heat exchanger, etc.
Used for installation or troubleshooting to test that wired connections and functions operate correctly.
Certain alarms, functions and normal control modes will be
blocked while manual testing is in progress.
On a return to the other image groups, the controller resumes
normal operation and all settings for manual testing will be
terminated.
Each image indicates which functions can be test run.
82
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
6.4.24 IQnavigator
(hand-held terminal)
6.4.24.1 Connect to IQlogic
IQnavigator
The method of connection between the IQnavigator and IQlogic
can be selected here.
Can be selected as direct (standard cable), DHCP or static IP (requires connection to network), and direct/wireless (requires the
IQnavigator hand-held terminal with WLAN TBLZ-1-71-2 accessory. See separate instructions).
Connect to IQlogic
Settings:
Value
Setting
range
Connect to IQlogic
Direct/DHCP/Static IP/
Direct/Wireless
IQnavigator IP address Optional
IQnavigator Netmask Optional
Pre-selected
Optional
IQnavigator gateway
IQlogic IP address
Optional
Factory
setting
Direct
6.4.24.2 Backlight brightness
The hand-held terminal can be set to four different backlight
brightness settings.
Brightness mode
Settings:
Value
Brightness mode
Setting
range
Auto adjust/Low/
Medium/High
Factory
setting
Auto adjust
6.4.24.3 Acoustics
Button sound effects on the hand-held terminal can be activated
and the volume can be set in five steps.
Acoustics
Settings:
Value
Button sound effects
Volume
Setting
range
On/Off
1-5
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Factory
settings
Off
3
www.swegon.com
83
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
7. Maintenance
Warning
Before carrying out any work, make sure that the power
supply to the air handling unit has been switched off.
7.1 Filter Change
Filters made of glass fibre should be replaced, and if a pre-filter
made of woven aluminium is fitted, it should be washed, when
the corresponding filter alarm has been activated.
Order new filters from Swegon or your nearest Swegon representative. Specify the size of the GOLD unit, whether the
replacement concerns one or two directions of airflow and if you
are replacing standard filters and/or possibly a pre-filter.
7.1.1 Removing filters
A
It is advisable to clean inside the filter space while the filters are
removed.
Standard filters:
Pull out the handles (A) to free the filters from the filter holder.
Withdraw the filters.
Pre-filters, if required, in the AHU:
Withdraw the filters.
7.1.2 Installing new filters
Standard filter:
Insert the filters into the filter holder At the same time, stretch
the filter bags, so that they will not become caught, damaged or
folded.
A
Insert the filters as far as possible into the unit and press them
lightly against the filter frames, so that they fit tightly.
Push in the handles (A) to clamp the filters in position in the filter
holder.
Close the inspection doors.
Calibrate the filters as described in Section 6.3.
Possible pre-filters in the AHU:
Insert the filters as far as possible into the unit and press them
lightly against the filter frames, so that they fit tightly
Calibrate the filters as described in Section 6.3.
84
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
7.2 Cleaning and Inspection
7.2.1 General
Clean the interior of the air handling unit if needed. Inspection
of the air handling unit should be performed when you change
filters or at least twice a year.
7.2.2 Filter spaces
Plate heat exchangers
Always clean against the regular direction of airflow.
Cleaning must only be done by blowing with compressed air,
vacuum cleaning with a soft nozzle or wet cleaning with water
and/or solvent. Before you begin cleaning, cover adjacent functional sections to protect them.
The most appropriate time to clean the unit is when you change
the filters.
If cleaning solvent is used, do not use solvent that will corrode
aluminium or copper. Swegon’s cleaning agent is recommended.
This cleaning agent is sold by Swegon Service.
7.2.3 Heat exchangers
Inspect the drain to make sure that it isn’t clogged. The by-pass
and shut-off dampers do not require maintenance.
Check at least twice a year whether cleaning is necessary. Cleaning can be done from the filter space.
Rotary heat exchanger
The heat exchanger should above all be cleaned by vacuum
cleaning with a soft nozzle to prevent damage to the air passages in the rotor.
Turn the rotor by hand to reach all surfaces. If the heat
exchanger is substantially fouled, its surfaces can be blown clean
with compressed air.
If needed, the heat exchanger can be withdrawn from the unit
casing and washed with degreasing solvent. Only service personnel trained by Swegon shall be permitted to wash it in this way.
Vinyl-coated fabric seal
Lift up the fabric seal and inspect its underside. Clean if needed
by brushing or vacuum cleaning.
If the fabric seal is worn or substantially fouled, it should be
replaced. Do not lubricate it!
Drive belt tension
Replace the drive belt if it feels loose or worn and slightly slips
if it meets resistance. Contact service personnel trained by
Swegon.
Coil heat exchangers
Make sure that the coils are purged of air. If a droplet eliminator
is fitted, remove it and flush it clean with water.
Always clean against the regular direction of airflow.
Cleaning must only be done by blowing with compressed air,
vacuum cleaning with a soft nozzle or wet cleaning with water
and/or solvent. Before you begin cleaning, cover adjacent functional sections to protect them.
If cleaning solvent is used, do not use solvent that will corrode
aluminium or copper. Swegon's cleaning agent is recommended.
This cleaning agent is sold by Swegon Service.
While cleaning, check whether venting is necessary, check the
content of glycol in the water and the condition of the coil for
leakage. Also check that the drain is not clogged.
7.2.4 Fans and fan spaces
Inspect and, if needed, clean the fan impellers to remove dirt
deposits.
Check the impeller to make sure that it is not out of balance.
Vacuum clean the fan motor or brush its surfaces. It can also be
cleaned by carefully wiping it with a damp cloth and with dishwashing detergent.
Clean the fan space, if needed.
7.3 Performance Checks
General performance checks should be carried out in conjunction with a filter change or at least once a year.
It is then appropriate to compare the current performance values
of the unit with those recorded in the Commissioning Record.
Remedial measures should be taken to correct any possible
deviations.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
85
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
8. Alarms and
Troubleshooting
8.1 General
Alarms are displayed by a flashing red LED in the hand-held
terminal.
When the LED flashes, go in under Alarm log in the dashboard.
See Section 4.2.2.3.
Active alarms, pending alarms and alarm history (50 latest) can
be viewed under Alarm log.
For resetting alarms, you can select individual alarms or all the
alarms.
The reset time can also be viewed under History.
A fault can be traced by examining the function or functional
component indicated in the alarm text.
If the fault cannot be immediately remedied:
Consider whether the air handling unit can continue to operate
until the fault has been remedied. Choose to block the alarm
and/or to change it from stop to operation. See Section 6.4.8.6.
8.1.1 A and B alarms
A alarms send an indication to the output for alarm relay A
(IQlogic module+).
B alarms send an indication to the output for alarm relay B
(IQlogic module+).
Alarms can be forwarded with different priority via these relays.
8.1.2 Resetting the alarm
Alarms with manual resetting can be reset from the hand-held
terminal. Select reset in the alarm log.
Alarms that reset themselves automatically will do so as soon as
the fault has been remedied.
Alarms can also be reset via a communication network (not
applicable to frost guard alarm).
8.1.3 Changing alarm settings
See Section 6.4.8.6.
86
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Alarm No.
8.2 Alarm Descriptions with Factory Settings
Priority
Alarm text
Function
Stop
Delay
Resetting
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
m = minute
1 = automatic
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
Alarm group 1: Fire alarm
1:1
EXTERNAL FIRE ALARM NO. 1 TRIPPED
For the fire protection function connected to terminals 6-7.
A1)
1
3s
0
1:2
EXTERNAL FIRE ALARM NO. 2 TRIPPED
For the fire protection function connected to terminals 8-9.
A1)
1
3s
0
1:3
INTERNAL FIRE ALARM TRIPPED
The air handling unit’s supply air sensor measures more than
70 °C and/or its extract air temperature sensor measures
more than 50 °C.
The function must be activated manually.
A1)
1
3s
0
Alarm group 2: External alarm
2:1
EXTERNAL ALARM NO. 1 TRIPPED
External alarm, connected to control unit terminals 10-11,
has tripped..
A
13)
1 s2)
0
2:2
EXTERNAL ALARM NO. 2 TRIPPED
External alarm, connected to control unit terminals 12-13,
has tripped..
B
03)
1 s2)
0
Alarm group 3: Pre-heating
3:1
PRE-HEAT, I/O MODULE NO. 9 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit’s control unit cannot establish correct
communication with I/O module No. 9 for pre-heating.
A
03)
10 s
1
3:2
PRE-HEAT, OVERHEATING PROTECTION FOR ELECTRIC AIR
HEATER TRIPPED
The overheating protection, electric air heater, has tripped.
A1)
03)
10 s
0
3:3
PRE-HEAT, FROST GUARD TRIPPED
Frost guard temperature sensor measures temperature less
than preset alarm limit.
Factory setting: 7 °C.
A1)
1
5s
0
3:4
PRE-HEAT, FROST GUARD TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Frost guard temperature sensor is defective or is not connected.
A1)
1
3s
1
3:5
PRE-HEAT, TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Sensor is defective or is not connected.
A
03)
3s
1
3:6
PRE-HEAT, VALVE MONITORING TRIPPED
Valve actuator, air heater for water is defective.
A
03)
10 m
0
3:7
PRE-HEAT, TEMPERATURE BELOW SET POINT ALARM LIMIT
Temperature is below preset set point longer than 20 minutes.
A
03)
20 m
0
3:8
PRE-HEAT, ALARM INPUT TRIPPED
Alarm input pre-heat has tripped.
A
0
20 s
0
Alarm group 4: Extra regulation sequence
4:1
EXTRA REGULATION SEQUENCE, I/O-MODULE No E
COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with I/O module No. E for extra regulation
sequence.
A
03)
10 s
1
4:2
EXTRA REGULATION SEQUENCE, OVERHEATING PROTECTION FOR ELECTRIC AIR HEATER TRIPPED
Overheating protection, electric air heater, has tripped.
A1)
03)
10 s
0
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
87
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Stop
Delay
Resetting
Alarm No.
Priority
Alarm text
Function
4:3
EXTRA REGULATION SEQUENCE, FROST GUARD TRIPPED
Frost guard temperature sensor measures temperature less
than preset alarm limit.
Factory setting: 7 °C.
A1)
1
5s
0
4:4
EXTRA REGULATION SEQUENCE, FROST GUARD TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Frost guard temperature sensor is defective or is not connected.
A1)
1
3s
1
4:5
EXTRA REGULATION SEQUENCE, VALVE MONITORING
TRIPPED
Valve actuator, air heater for water, is defective.
B
03)
10 m
0
A
0
20 s
0
B
0
5m
1
4:6
EXTRA REGULATION SEQUENCE, ALARM INPUT TRIPPED
Alarm input extra regulation sequence has tripped.
4:10 EXTRA REGULATION SEQUENCE, TEMPERATURE PROTECTION VIA COMMUNICATION, COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit’s control unit is not receiving any temperature reading via the external communication interface
within the preset time limit.
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
Alarm group 5: Reheating
5:1
REHEAT, OVERHEATING PROTECTION FOR ELECTRIC AIR
HEATER TRIPPED
The overheating protection, electric air heater, has tripped.
A1)
03)
10 s
0
5:2
REHEAT, FROST GUARD TRIPPED
Frost guard temperature sensor measures temperature less
than preset alarm limit.
Factory setting: 7 °C.
A1)
1
5s
0
5:3
REHEAT, FROST GUARD TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Frost guard temperature sensor is defective or is not connected.
REHEAT, VALVE MONITORING TRIPPED
Valve actuator, air heater for water is defective.
A1)
1
3s
1
B
03)
10 m
0
A
03)
10 s
1
A1)
03)
10 s
0
A1)
1
5s
0
5:4
Alarm group 6: Xzone I/O-module no. A
6:1
6:2
6:3
Xzone, I/O-MODULE NO. A COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with I/O module No. A for Xzone.
Xzone, OVERHEATING PROTECTION FOR ELECTRIC AIR
HEATER TRIPPED
The overheating protection, electric air heater, has tripped.
Xzone, FROST GUARD TRIPPED
Frost guard temperature sensor measures temperature less
than preset alarm limit.
Factory setting: 7 °C.
6:4
Xzone, FROST GUARD TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Frost guard temperature sensor is defective or is not connected.
A1)
1
3s
1
6:5
Xzone, SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Supply air sensor is defective or is not connected.
A
13)
3s
1
6:6
Xzone, HEATING VALVE MONITORING TRIPPED
Valve actuator, air heater for water is defective.
B
03)
10 m
0
6:7
Xzone, SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE BELOW SET POINT
ALARM LIMIT
The supply air temperature is below the preset set point
(ERS and Supply air regulation) or Min SA temp (Extract air
regulation) longer than 20 minutes.
A
03)
20 m
0
88
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Stop
Delay
Resetting
Alarm No.
Priority
Alarm text
Function
6:8
Xzone, SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE ABOVE SET POINT
ALARM LIMIT
The supply air temperature is above the preset set point
(ERS and Supply air regulation) or Max. SA temp (Extract air
regulation) longer than 20 minutes.
B
03)
20 m
0
6:9
Xzone, HEAT, ALARM INPUT TRIPPED
Alarm input Xzone heat has tripped.
A
0
20 s
0
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
Alarm group 7: Xzone I/O-module no. B
7:1
Xzone, I/O-MODULE NO. B COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with I/O module No. B for Xzone.
A
03)
10 s
1
7:2
Xzone, EXTRACT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Extract air sensor is defective or is not connected.
A
13)
3s
1
7:3
Xzone, COOLING VALVE MONITORING TRIPPED
Valve actuator, air cooler for water is defective.
B
03)
10 m
0
7:4
Xzone, EXTRACT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR BELOW SET
POINT ALARM LIMIT
The extract air temperature is below preset alarm limit for
more than 20 minutes.
A
03)
20 m
0
7:5
Xzone, COOL, ALARM INPUT 1 TRIPPED
Alarm input 1 Xzone cool has tripped.
A
0
20 s
0
7:6
Xzone, COOL, ALARM INPUT 2 TRIPPED
Alarm input 2 Xzone cool has tripped.
A
0
20 s
0
B
03)
10 s
0
10:1 SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Supply air sensor is defective or is not connected.
A
13)
3s
1
10:2 SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR DENSITY COMPENSATION DEFECTIVE
Supply air sensor in the supply air fan intake cannot establish
correct communication or shows an incorrect value.
B
03)
3s
1
10:3 EXTRACT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Extract air sensor is defective or is not connected.
10:4 EXTRACT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR DENSITY COMPENSATION DEFECTIVE (GOLD RX/PX/CX)
Temperature sensor in extract air fan intake cannot establish
correct communication or shows incorrect value.
GOLD RX
Exhaust air regulation has been selected, but the temperature sensor in the exhaust air is defective or is not connected.
A
13)
3s
1
B
03)
3s
1
10:5 EXTRACT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR HEAT EXCHANGER DEFROSTING DEFECTIVE
Temperature sensor, for heat exchanger defrosting is defective.
A
13)
10 s
1
10:6 EXTRACT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR DENSITY COMPENSATION IN SD AHU DEFECTIVE
Temperature sensor in extract air fan intake cannot establish
correct communication or shows incorrect value.
A
13)
10 s
1
Alarm group 8: Cooling
8:5
COOLING, VALVE MONITORING TRIPPED
Valve actuator, air cooler, is defective.
Alarm group 9: Spare
Alarm group 10: AHU, internal temperature sensor
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
89
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Priority
Alarm text
Function
Stop
Delay
Resetting
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
10:7 EXTRACT AIR DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
The temperature sensor in the extract air duct is defective or
is not connected.
A
13)
10 s
1
10:10 OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE (GOLD
SD)
Outdoor temperature sensor is defective or is not connected.
B
03)
3s
1
11:1 ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. 1 DEFECTIVE
Room temperature sensor 1 is defective or is not connected.
B
03)
10 s
1
11:2 ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. 2 DEFECTIVE
Room temperature sensor 2 is defective or is not connected.
B
03)
10 s
1
11:3 ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. 3 DEFECTIVE
Room temperature sensor 3 is defective or is not connected.
B
03)
10 s
1
11:4 ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. 4 DEFECTIVE
Room temperature sensor 4 is defective or is not connected.
11:5 Xzone, ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. 5 DEFECTIVE
Xzone room temperature sensor 5 is defective or is not connected.
B
03)
10 s
1
B
03)
10 s
1
11:6 Xzone, ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. 6 DEFECTIVE
Xzone room temperature sensor 6 is defective or is not connected.
B
03)
10 s
1
11:7 Xzone, ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. 7 DEFECTIVE
Xzone room temperature sensor 7 is defective or is not connected.
B
03)
10 s
1
11:8 Xzone, ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. 8 DEFECTIVE
Xzone room temperature sensor 8 is defective or is not connected.
B
03)
10 s
1
11:9 OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. A DEFECTIVE
Outdoor temperature sensor A is defective or is not connected.
11:10 OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. B DEFECTIVE
Outdoor temperature sensor B is defective or is not connected.
11:11 OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. C DEFECTIVE
Outdoor temperature sensor C is defective or is not connected.
B
03)
10 s
1
B
03)
10 s
1
B
03)
10 s
1
11:12 OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. D DEFECTIVE
Outdoor temperature sensor D is defective or is not connected.
B
03)
10 s
1
11:13 ROOM TEMPERATURE VIA COMMUNICATION, COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit’s control unit is not receiving any temperature reading via the external communication interface
within the preset time limit.
11.14 Xzone, ROOM TEMPERATURE VIA COMMUNICATION, COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit’s control unit is not receiving any temperature reading via the external communication interface
within the preset time limit.
B
03)
5 m2)
1
B
03)
5 m2)
1
11:15 OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE VIA COMMUNICATION, COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit’s control unit is not receiving any temperature reading via the external communication interface
within the preset time limit.
B
03)
5 m2)
1
Alarm group 11: External temperature sensors
90
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Priority
Alarm text
Function
Stop
Delay
Resetting
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
12:1 SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE BELOW SET POINT ALARM LIMIT
The supply air temperature is lower than the preset set point
(ERS, ORS, ORE and Supply air regulation) or has deviated
from the supply air controller’s current set point (Extract air
regulation) longer than 20 minutes.
A
13)
20 m
0
12:2 SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE ABOVE SET POINT ALARM LIMIT
The supply air temperature is above the preset set point
(ERS, ORS, ORE and Supply air regulation) or has deviated
from the supply air controller’s current set point (Extract air
regulation) longer than 20 minutes.
12:6 EXTRACT AIR TEMPERATURE BELOW ALARM LIMIT
The extract air temperature is below preset alarm limit for
more than 20 minutes.
B
03)
20 m
0
A
13)
20 m
0
A
13)
30 s2)
0
B
03)
10 s
1
A
03)
10 s
1
13:3 EXTRACT AIR HUMIDITY SENSOR DEFECTIVE
The humidity sensor in the extract air duct is defective or is
not connected.
A
03)
10 s
1
13:9 HUMIDIFIER, ALARM OUTPUT TRIPPED
The humidifier has tripped alarm output.
13:11 VOC SENSOR COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the VOC sensor.
13:12 VOC SENSOR, INTERNAL COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot achieve correct
communication with the VOC sensor.
A
03)
10 s
0
B
03)
20 m
1
B
03)
60 s
1
13:13 VOC SENSOR, INTERNAL ERROR
VOC sensor defective.
B
03)
60 s
1
13:14 VOC SENSOR, LEVEL BELOW/ABOVE SET POINT ALARM
LIMIT
The VOC sensor has read a level below or above the set
point alarm limit for more than 60 seconds.
B
03)
60 s
1
15:1 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER, I/O-MODULE NO. 2 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct communication with I/O module No. 2 for plate heat
exchanger.
A
13)4)
10 s
1
15:2 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER, TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. 1
DEFECTIVE
Temperature sensor 1 for frost guard in heat exchanger cube
is defective or is not connected.
A
13)4)
3s
1
Alarm group 12: AHU, temperature diff.
12:11 TEMPERATURE MONITOR BELOW ALARM LIMIT
The temperature monitor reading is below preset alarm limit.
Alarm group 13: Humidity/VOC
13:1 HUMIDIFICATION, I/O MODULE NO. 4 COMMUNICATION
ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with I/O module No. 4 for humidity.
13:2 SUPPLY AIR HUMIDITY SENSOR DEFECTIVE
The humidity sensor in the supply air duct is defective or is
not connected.
Alarm group 14: Spare
Alarm group 15: Plate heat exchanger
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
91
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Priority
Alarm text
Function
Stop
Delay
Resetting
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
15:3 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER, TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO. 2
DEFECTIVE
Temperature sensor 2 for frost guard in heat exchanger cube
is defective or is not connected.
A
13)4)
3s
1
15:4 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER, DAMPER MONITORING TRIPPED
Damper actuator for plate heat exchanger is defective.
A
03)4)
10 m
0
16:1 COIL HEAT EXCHANGER, I/O-MODULE NO. 1 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct communication with I/O module No. 1 for coil heat
exchanger.
A
13)4)
10 s
1
16:2 COIL HEAT EXCHANGER, TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
The temperature sensor on the coil heat exchanger’s
pipework package for the frost guard is defective or is not
connected.
A
13)4)
3s
1
16:3 COIL HEAT EXCHANGER, VALVE MONITORING TRIPPED
Valve actuator of the coil heat exchanger is defective.
A
03)4)
10 m
0
16:4 COIL HEAT EXCHANGER, PUMP MONITORING TRIPPED
Pump of the coil heat exchanger does not go to correct position. The position-confirming output signal from the pump is
not the same as the input control signal.
A
13)4)
20 s
0
17:1 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER, MOTOR CONTROLLER COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit’s control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the heat exchanger motor controller.
A
13)4)
10 s
1
17:2 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER, DEFROSTING PRESSURE SENSOR NO. 7 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit’s control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the heat exchanger pressure sensor no.
7. Applicable to the defrosting function only.
B
03)
10 s
1
17:3 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER, DEFROSTING PRESSURE OVER
ALARM LIMIT
The heat exchanger’s defrosting function has operated for
max. period 6 times during one 24-hour period.
B
13)4)
144 m
0
17:4 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER, ROTATION DETECTOR TRIPPED
No impulses from the rotation detector are registered with
the heat exchanger controller.
A1)
13)4)
3s
0
17:5 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER, MOTOR CONTROLLER OVERCURRENT
Heat exchanger motor controller has registered excessively
high current supplier to the drive motor.
17:6 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER, MOTOR CONTROLLER UNDERVOLTAGE
Low feed voltage is supplied to the rotary heat exchanger’s
motor controller.
A1)
13)4)
3s
0
A1)
13)4)
3s
0
17:7 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER, MOTOR CONTROLLER OVERVOLTAGE
High feed voltage is supplied to the rotary heat exchanger's
motor controller.
A1)
13)4)
3s
0
17:8 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER, MOTOR CONTROLLER EXCESS
TEMPERATURE
High temperature (90°C) inside the heat exchanger’s motor
controller.
A1)
13)4)
3s
0
Alarm group 16: Coil heat exchangers
Alarm group 17: Rotary heat exchanger
92
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Priority
Alarm text
Function
Stop
Delay
Resetting
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
A1)
13)4)
3s
0
18:1 AYC, I/O MODULE No. 7 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with I/O module No. 7 for AYC.
A
03)
10 s
1
18:2 AYC HEATING, TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Heating temperature sensor is defective or is not connected.
A
03)
3s
1
18:3 AYC HEATING, VALVE MONITORING TRIPPED
The heated water valve actuator is defective.
B
03)
10 m
0
18:4 AYC HEATING, PUMP MONITORING TRIPPED
The heated water pump is defective.
A
03)
20 s
0
18:5 AYC HEATING, TEMPERATURE BELOW SET POINT LIMIT
Heating water temperature is below preset set point longer
than 30 minutes.
A
03)
30 m
0
18:6 AYC HEATING, TEMPERATURE ABOVE SET POINT ALARM
LIMIT 5)
Heating water temperature exceeds preset set point longer
than 30 minutes.
B
03)
30 m
0
18:9 AYC COOLING, TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Temperature sensor for the AYC function (All Year Comfort)
cooling is defective or is not connected.
18:10 AYC COOLING, VALVE MONITORING TRIPPED
The chilled water valve actuator is defective.
A
03)
3s
1
B
03)
10 m
0
18:11 AYC COOLING, PUMP MONITORING TRIPPED
The chilled water pump is defective.
A
03)
20 s
0
18:12 AYC COOLING, TEMPERATURE BELOW SET POINT ALARM
LIMIT
Heating water temperature is below preset set point longer
than 30 minutes.
A
03)
30 m
0
18:13 AYC COOLING, TEMPERATURE ABOVE SET POINT ALARM
LIMIT 5)
Cooling water temperature exceeds preset set point longer
than 30 minutes.
B
03)
30 m
0
21:1 COOL DX, I/O MODULE NO. 2 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The AHU control unit cannot establish correct communication with I/O module No. 2 for the COOL DX.
B
03)
10 s
1
21:2 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 1 LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
DEFECTIVE
Low pressure sensor is defective or is not connected.
21:3 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 1 LOW PRESSURE BELOW
ALARM LIMIT
The low pressure sensor measures lower pressure than preset alarm limit pressure.
21:4 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 1 HIGH PRESSURE SENSOR
DEFECTIVE
High pressure sensor is defective or is not connected.
A1)
03)
5s
1
A1)
03)
5s
0
A1)
03)
5s
1
17:9 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER, MOTOR CONTROLLER START
UP ERROR
Drive motor does not rotate during start up.
Alarm group 18: AYC
Alarm group 19-20: Spare
Alarm group 21: COOL DX
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
93
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Priority
Alarm text
Function
Stop
Delay
Resetting
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
21:5 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 1 HIGH PRESSURE ABOVE
ALARM LIMIT
The high pressure sensor measures higher pressure than
preset alarm limit pressure.
A1)
03)
3s
0
21:6 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 1 MONITORING TRIPPED
Monitoring of compressor is defective.
A
03)
3s
0
21:7 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 1 RESTART ERROR
Compressor will not restart.
A
03)
10 s
0
21:8 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 2 LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
DEFECTIVE
Low pressure sensor is defective or is not connected.
A1)
03)
5s
1
21:9 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 2 LOW PRESSURE BELOW
ALARM LIMIT
The low pressure sensor measures lower pressure than preset alarm limit pressure.
A1)
03)
5s
0
21:10 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 2 HIGH PRESSURE SENSOR
DEFECTIVE
High pressure sensor is defective or is not connected.
A1)
03)
5s
1
21:11 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 2 HIGH PRESSURE ABOVE
ALARM LIMIT
The high pressure sensor measures higher pressure than
preset alarm limit pressure.
21:12 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 2 MONITORING TRIPPED
Monitoring of compressor is defective.
A1)
03)
3s
0
A
03)
3s
0
21:13 COOL DX, COMPRESSOR NO. 2 RESTART ERROR
Compressor will not restart.
A
03)
10 s
0
21:14 COOL DX, OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
Outdoor air temperature sensor is defective or is not connected.
B
03)
3s
1
21:15 COOL DX, PHASE SEQUENCE MONITOR ERROR
Phase sequence protection for feed voltage to COOL DX has
tripped.
A
03)
5s
0
23:1 SMART Link, COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit’s control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the chiller/heat pump.
A
03)
30 s
1
23:2 SMART Link, ALARM LEVEL 1 TRIPPED
Chiller/heat pump has tripped, group alarm level 1.
B
03)
30 s
0
23:3 SMART Link, ALARM LEVEL 2 TRIPPED
Chiller/heat pump has tripped, group alarm level 2.
B
03)
30 s
0
23:4 SMART Link, ALARM LEVEL 3 TRIPPED
Chiller/heat pump has tripped, group alarm level 3.
23:10 AQUA Link, I/O MODULE NO. 5 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit’s control unit cannot establish correct
communication with I/O module no. 5, AQUA Link
B
03)
30 s
0
B
03)
10 s
1
23:11 AQUA Link, PUMP MONITORING TRIPPED
Pump to AQUA Link is defective.
B
03)
10 s
0
A
03)
30 s
1
Alarm group 22: Spare
Alarm group 23: SMART Link
Alarm group 24: SMART Link DX
24:1 SMART Link, no. 1 communication error
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the chiller/heat pump 1.
94
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Priority
Alarm text
Function
Stop
Delay
Resetting
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
24:2 SMART Link, no. 1 alarm tripped
Chiller 1 defective.
A
03)
30 s
1
24:4 SMART Link, no. 2 communication error
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the chiller/heat pump 2.
A
03)
30 s
1
24:5 SMART Link, no. 2 alarm tripped
Chiller 2 defective.
24:7 SMART Link, no. 3 communication error
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the chiller/heat pump 3.
A
03)
30 s
1
A
03)
30 s
1
24:8 SMART Link, no. 3 alarm tripped
Chiller 3 defective.
24:10 SMART Link, no. 4 communication error
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the chiller/heat pump 4.
A
03)
30 s
1
A
03)
30 s
1
24:11 SMART Link, no. 4 alarm tripped
Chiller 4 defective.
A
03)
30 s
1
26:1 PRE-FILTER, SUPPLY AIR PRESSURE SENSOR NO. 8 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit’s control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the sensor of the supply air pre-filter.
B
03)
10 s
1
26:2 PRE-FILTER, SUPPLY AIR FOULED
The pressure across the supply air pre-filter exceeds the
preset alarm limit for more than 10 minutes.
B
03)
10 m
0
26:7 PRE-FILTER, EXTRACT AIR PRESSURE SENSOR NO. 9 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the sensor of the extract air pre-filter.
26:8 PRE-FILTER, EXTRACT AIR FOULED
The pressure across the extract air pre-filter exceeds the
preset alarm limit for more than 10 minutes.
B
03)
10 s
1
B
03)
10 m
0
27:1 AHU FILTER, SUPPLY AIR PRESSURE SENSOR NO. 3/4 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the sensor of the AHU supply air filter.
B
03)
10 s
1
27:2 AHU FILTER, SUPPLY AIR FOULED
The pressure across the AHU supply air filter has exceeded
the preset alarm limit for more than 10 minutes.
B
03)
10 m
0
27:7 AHU FILTER, EXTRACT AIR PRESSURE SENSOR NO. 3/4 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the sensor of the AHU extract air filter.
B
03)
10 s
1
27:8 AHU FILTER, EXTRACT AIR FOULED
The pressure across the AHU extract air filter has exceeded
the preset alarm limit for more than 10 minutes.
B
03)
10 m
0
B
03)
10 s
1
Alarm group 24-25: Spare
Alarm group 26: Pre-filter
Alarm group 27: AHU, internal filters
Alarm group 28: Final filter
28:1 END FILTER, SUPPLY AIR PRESSURE SENSOR NO. A COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the sensor of the supply air end filter.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
95
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Priority
Alarm text
Function
Stop
Delay
Resetting
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
B
03)
10 m
0
30:1 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT, SUPPLY AIR PRESSURE SENSOR
NO. 1/2 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the flow pressure sensor in the supply
air.
A
13)
10 s
1
30:2 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT, SUPPLY AIRFLOW BELOW SET
POINT ALARM LIMIT
The supply airflow has gone below its set point by more that
10%, during a longer period than 20 minutes.
B
03)
20 m
0
30:3 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT, SUPPLY AIRFLOW ABOVE SET
POINT ALARM LIMIT
The supply airflow has exceeded its set point by more that
10%, during a longer period than 20 minutes.
B
03)
20 m
0
30:6 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT, EXTRACT AIR PRESSURE SENSOR
NO. 1/2 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the flow pressure sensor in the extract
air.
A
13)
10 s
1
30:7 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT,EXTRACT AIRFLOW BELOW SET
POINT ALARM LIMIT
The extract airflow has gone below its set point by more
that 10%, during a longer period than 20 minutes.
B
03)
20 m
0
30:8 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT, EXTRACT AIRFLOW ABOVE SET
POINT ALARM LIMIT
The extract airflow has exceeded its set point by more that
10%, during a longer period than 20 minutes.
B
03)
20 m
0
30:11 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT, PURGING PRESSURE SENSOR NO.
B COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the sensor of the rotary heat exchanger
purging sector.
B
03)
10 s
1
31:1 PRESSURE REGULATION, SUPPLY AIR PRESSURE SENSOR NO.
5 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the duct pressure sensor in the supply
air. Applies only to pressure regulation of the supply air.
A
13)
10 s
1
31:2 PRESSURE REGULATION, SUPPLY AIR PRESSURE BELOW SET
POINT ALARM LIMIT
The duct pressure has gone below its set point by more that
10%, during a longer period than 20 minutes ( if pressure
sensors are connected).
B
03)
20 m
0
31:3 PRESSURE REGULATION, SUPPLY AIR PRESSURE ABOVE SET
POINT ALARM LIMIT
The supply air duct pressure has exceeded its set point by
more that 10%, during a longer period than 20 minutes (if
pressure sensors are connected).
B
03)
20 m
0
28:2 END FILTER, SUPPLY AIR, FOULED
The pressure across the supply air end filter has exceeded
the preset alarm limit for more than 10 minutes.
Alarm group 29: Spare
Alarm group 30: Flow measurement
Alarm group 31: Pressure regulation
96
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Priority
Alarm text
Function
Stop
Delay
Resetting
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
31:6 PRESSURE REGULATION, EXTRACT AIR PRESSURE SENSOR
NO. 6 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the duct pressure sensor in the extract
air. Applies only to pressure regulation of the extract air.
A
13)
10 s
1
31:7 PRESSURE REGULATION, EXTRACT AIR PRESSURE BELOW
SET POINT ALARM LIMIT
The extract air duct pressure has gone below its set point by
more that 10%, during a longer period than 20 minutes (if
pressure sensors are connected).
B
03)
20 m
0
31:8 PRESSURE REGULATION, EXTRACT AIR PRESSURE ABOVE
SET POINT ALARM LIMIT
The extract air duct pressure has exceeded its set point by
more that 10%, during a longer period than 20 minutes (if
pressure sensors are connected).
B
03)
20 m
0
32:1 ReCO2, I/O MODULE NO. 0 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with I/O module no. 0.
A
03)
10 s
1
32:2 ReCO2, PRESSURE SENSOR NO. 0 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the pressure sensor.
A
03)
10 s
1
32:3 ReCO2, RECIRCULATED AIR DAMPER MONITORING TRIPPED
The damper actuator does not move to the right position.
The position-confirming output signal from the damper is
not the same as the input control signal.
B
03)
10 m
0
32:4 ReCO2, OUTDOOR AIR DAMPER MONITORING TRIPPED
The damper actuator does not move to the right position.
The position-confirming output signal from the damper is
not the same as the input control signal.
B
03)
10 m
0
B
03)
5 s 2)
0
–
–
–
06)
34:1 EXTERNAL CONTROL, I/O MODULE NO. 3 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with I/O module No. 3 for external control.
B
03)
10 s
1
34:2 EXTERNAL CONTROL, I/O MODULE NO. 6 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with I/O module No. 6 for external control.
B
03)
10 s
1
B
03)
10 s
1
Alarm group 32: ReCO2
Alarm group 33: Service
33:1 PERIOD BETWEEN SERVICING PAST ALARM LIMIT
The preset service period has expired.
If the alarm is RESET via the hand-held terminal, the alarm
will be initiated again after 7 days.
A new service period can be set and reset under ALARM
SETTINGS.
33:15 LOCK FUNCTION TRIPPED
Contact Swegon or their representative.
Alarm group 34: External controls
Alarm group 35: Booster diffusers
35:1 BOOSTER AIR TERMINALS, I/O MODULE NO. 8 COMMUNICATION ERROR
The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with I/O module No. 8 for Booster diffusers.
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
97
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Priority
Alarm text
Function
Stop
Delay
Resetting
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
38- MIRU Control NO. 1-10 COMMUNICATION ERROR
47:1 The air handling unit’s control unit cannot establish correct
communication with MIRU Control.
A
03)
10 s
1
38- MIRU Control NO. 1-10 MOTOR CONTROL ALARM TRIPPED
47:2 The MIRU Control motor controller has tripped.
A
03)
5s
1
38- MIRU Control NO. 1-10 MOTOR CONTROL COMMUNICA47:3 TION ERROR
MIRU Control unit cannot establish correct communication
with the power roof ventilator’s motor controller.
38- MIRU Control NO. 1-10 FLOW MEASUREMENT PRESSURE
47:4 SENSOR NO. 0 COMMUNICATION ERROR
MIRU Control unit cannot establish correct communication
with the power roof ventilator's flow measurement pressure
sensor.
A
03)
5s
1
A
03)
5s
1
38- MIRU Control NO. 1-10 PRESSURE REGULATION SENSOR
47:5 NO. 1 COMMUNICATION ERROR
MIRU Control unit cannot establish correct communication
with the power roof ventilator's duct pressure sensor.
A
03)
5s
1
38- MIRU Control NO. 1-10 TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEFECTIVE
47:6 The MIRU Control temperature sensor is defective or is not
connected.
38- MIRU Control NO. 1-10 FLOW/PRESSURE DEVIATION FROM
47:7 THE SET POINT ALARM LIMIT
The airflow/pressure has continuously exceeded or been
below its set point by more than 20%.
B
03)
5s
1
B
03)
5s
1
49- SUPPLY AIR FAN 1-3/A-B COMMUNICATION ERROR
54:1 The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the supply air fan motor controller.
A
13)
10 s
1
49- SUPPLY AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER OVERCUR54:2 RENT
High current supplied to motor
A1)
13)
3s
0
49- SUPPLY AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER UNDERVOLT54:3 AGE
Voltage below the normal level is supplied.
A1)
13)
3s
0
49- SUPPLY AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER OVERVOLT54:4 AGE
Excessively high voltage is supplied.
49- SUPPLY AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER EXCESS
54:5 TEMPERATURE
High internal temperature.
A1)
13)
3s
0
A1)
13)
3s
0
49- SUPPLY AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROL START UP ER54:6 ROR
Supply air fan does not rotate during start up.
A1)
13)
3s
0
49- SUPPLY AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER UNEVEN
54:7 PHASE VOLTAGE
High voltage difference between the phases (3-phase, 400
V), which causes rippling.
A1)
13)
3s
1
49- SUPPLY AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER PHASE
54:8 FAILURE
Phase failure in motor controller.
A1)
13)
3s
1
Alarm group 36-37: Spare
Alarm group 38-47: MIRU Control 1-10 7)
Alarm group 49-54: Supply air fan no. 1A-3B 8)
98
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Priority
Alarm text
Function
Stop
Delay
Resetting
0 = Blocked 0 = In operat.
s = second
0 = manual
A = A alarm
B = B alarm
1 = Stop
m = minute
1 = automatic
49- SUPPLY AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER MEMORY
54:9 ERROR
Internal memory error in motor controller.
A1)
13)
3s
0
49- SUPPLY AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER CURRENT
54:10 LIMITATION
Current limitation in motor controller.
B
03)
3s
1
A
13)
10 s
1
A1)
13)
3s
0
55- EXTRACT AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER UNDER60:3 VOLTAGE
Voltage below the normal level is supplied.
A1)
13)
3s
0
55- EXTRACT AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER OVERCUR60:4 RENT
Excessively high voltage is supplied.
55- EXTRACT AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER EXCESS
60:5 TEMPERATURE
High internal temperature.
A1)
13)
3s
0
A1)
13)
3s
0
55- EXTRACT AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER START UP
60:6 ERROR
Extract air fan does not rotate during start up.
A1)
13)
3s
0
55- EXTRACT AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER UNEVEN
60:7 PHASE VOLTAGE
High voltage difference between the phases (3-phase, 400
V), which causes rippling.
A1)
13)
3s
1
55- EXTRACT AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER PHASE
60:8 FAILURE
Phase failure in motor controller.
A1)
13)
3s
1
55- ETRACT AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER MEMORY
60:9 ERROR
Internal memory error in motor controller.
A1)
13)
3s
0
55- EXTRACT AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER CURRENT
60:10 LIMITATION
Current limitation in motor controller.
B
03)
3s
1
Alarm group 55-60: Extract air fan no. 1A-3B 9)
55- EXTRACT AIR FAN 1-3/A-B COMMUNICATION ERROR
60:1 The air handling unit's control unit cannot establish correct
communication with the extract air fan motor controller.
55- EXTRACT AIR FAN 1-3/A-B MOTOR CONTROLLER OVERCUR60:2 RENT
High current supplied to motor
Cannot be blocked.
The delay is adjustable.
3)
Adjustable.
4)
Stops the AHU if the temperature is below the adjustable limit.
5)
Inactive as factory setting.
6)
Contact Swegon or their representative.
7)
Alarm group 38 = MIRU Control 1. Alarm group 39 = MIRU Control 2. Alarm group 40 = MIRU Control 3. Alarm group 41 = MIRU
Control 4. Alarm group 42 = MIRU Control 5. Alarm group 43 = MIRU Control 6. Alarm group 44 = MIRU Control 7. Alarm group 45
= MIRU Control 8. Alarm group 46 = MIRU Control 9. Alarm group 47 = MIRU Control 10.
8)
Alarm group 49 = Supply air fan 1A. Alarm group 50 = Supply air fan 2A. Alarm group 51 = Supply air fan 3A. Alarm group 52 =
Supply air fan 1B. Alarm group 53 = Supply air fan 2B. Alarm group 54 = Supply air fan 3B.
9)
Alarm group 55 = Extrat air fan 1A. Alarm group 56 = Extrat air fan 2A. Alarm group 57 = Extrat air fan 3A. Alarm group 58 =
Extrat air fan 1B. Alarm group 59 = Extrat air fan 2B. Alarm group 60 = Extrat air fan 3B.
1)
2)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
99
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
9. Information Messages
Information messages are displayed in the hand-held terminal.
Information messages are displayed only when the terminal is in
the Dashboard image.
Message No.
Message text
98:1
SUPPLY AIR PRE-FILTER CALIBRATION NOT PERFORMED
Pre-filter calibration, supply air, not performed after first start. Recurrent at 30 minute intervals. The message is
not received after completed filter calibration.
98:2
SUPPLY AIR PRE-FILTER CALIBRATION FAILURE
Pre-filter calibration failure, supply air. Recurrent at 5 second intervals.
98:3
EXTRACT AIR PRE-FILTER CALIBRATION NOT PERFORMED
Pre-filter calibration, extract air, not performed after first start. Recurrent at 30 minute intervals. The message
is not received after completed filter calibration.
98:4
EXTRACT AIR PRE-FILTER CALIBRATION FAILURE
Pre-filter calibration failure, extract air. Recurrent at 5 second intervals.
98:5
SUPPLY AIR AHU FILTER CALIBRATION NOT PERFORMED
supply air AHU filter calibration, supply air, not performed after first start. Recurrent at 30 minute intervals.
The message is not received after completed filter calibration.
98:6
SUPPLY AIR AHU FILTER CALIBRATION FAILURE
AHU filter calibration failure, supply air. Recurrent at 5 second intervals.
98:7
EXTRACT AIR AHU FILTER CALIBRATION NOT PERFORMED
AHU filter calibration, extract air, not performed after first start. Recurrent at 30 minute intervals. The message
is not received after completed filter calibration.
98:8
EXTRACT AIR AHU FILTER CALIBRATION FAILURE
AHU filter calibration failure, extract air. Recurrent at 5 second intervals.
98:9
SUPPLY AIR END FILTER CALIBRATION NOT PERFORMED
End filter calibration, supply air, not performed after first start. Recurrent at 30 minute intervals. The message
is not received after completed filter calibration.
98:10
SUPPLY AIR END FILTER CALIBRATION FAILURE
End filter calibration failure, supply air. Recurrent at 5 second intervals.
98:11
ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER DEFROSTING CALIBRATION NOT PERFORMED
Defrost calibration, rotary heat exchanger, not performed after function was activated for first time. Recurrent
at 30 minute intervals. The message is not received after completed heat exchanger calibration.
98:12
ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER DEFROSTING CALIBRATION FAILURE
Defrost calibration failure, rotary heat exchanger. Recurrent at 5 second intervals.
98:13
ReCO2 CALIBRATION NOT PERFORMED
ReCO2 calibration not performed after function was activated for first time. Recurrent at 30 minute intervals.
Message is not received after completed ReCO2 calibration.
98:14
ReCO2 CALIBRATION FAILURE
ReCO2 calibration failure. Recurrent at 5 second intervals.
98:15
ReCO2 WRONG SETTING
Pressure regulation, slave control or wrong type of AHU is selected. Recurrent at 5 second intervals.
E-MAIL ERROR
Error when sending e-mail. The message is received after ten tries.
99:1
100
Information messages provide information e.g. about necessary
settings that have not been entered or unfavourable operating
conditions.
99:7
SD SHORT MEMORY SOON FULL
The SD card's memory is soon full. The oldest log data will sonn be deleted.
99:8
SD SHORT MEMORY FULL
The SD card's memory is full. The oldest log data is being deleted.
99:14
INTERNAL SERIAL MEMORY ERROR CPEx1
Internal serial memory error CPEx1
99:15
CLOCK CIRCUIT DEFECTIVE
Circuit for the clock is defective
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
10. Technical Data
10.1 Dimensions, GOLD RX one-piece air handling unit
with rotary heat exchanger
GOLD 04/05, 07/08
403
91
91
GOLD
GOLD
52
52
J
50
* The air handling unit is supplied without end
connection panel if a duct accessory housed in
an insulated casing will be connected.
Base beams are optional.
50
GOLD 11/12
K
403
16
K
91
91
GOLD
J
50
52
50
* The air handling unit is
supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory
housed in an insulated casing
will be connected.
GOLD
52
50
GOLD Top 11/12
GOLD RX Top 04/05, 07/08
403
16
403
91
GOLD
J
50
GOLD
16
91
GOLD
GOLD
52
52
52
50
J
52
J
50
50
50
Base beams are optional.
C
K
C
Size
A
B
C
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
Ø
Weight, kg
04/05
750
825
240
345
230
460
920
561
–
1500
315
214-243
Top 04/05
750
825
233,5
1033
237,5
350
920
561
–
1500
315
247
07
800
995
277,5
440
271
543
1085
730
–
1600
400
262-301
Top 07
800
995
276
1048
280
435
1085
730
–
1600
400
306
08
800
995
277,5
440
271
543
1085
730
–
1600
400
270-309
Top 08
800
995
276
1048
280
435
1085
730
–
1600
400
310
11
655
1199
324
550
324
647
1295
935
551
1860
500
444-496
Top 11
655
1199
332
550
333
533
1295
935
1196
1860
500
488
12
655
1199
324
550
324
647
1295
935
551
1860
500
466-518
Top 12
655
1199
332
550
333
533
1295
935
1196
1860
500
504
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
101
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
GOLD 14/20, 25/30
403
E
91
91
M
GOLD
GOLD
M
50
52
50
52
50
50
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
The dimension print shows the connection configuration for fan arrangement 1.
For fan arrangement 2 the connections are mirror-inverted.
GOLD 35/40
34
M
GOLD
GOLD
M
50
52
50
52
50
50
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
The dimension print shows the connection configuration for fan arrangement 1. For fan arrangement 2 the connections are mirror-inverted.
GOLD 50/60
GOLD 70/80
34
52*
28*
137
GOLD
GOLD
GOLD
GOLD
52
28
76
76
76
76
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
102
Size
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Weight, kg
14
765
1400
1136
550
208
400
1000
1395
298
109
200
2080
188
521-589
20
765
1400
1136
550
208
400
1000
1395
298
109
200
2080
188
557-625
25
835
1600
1336
550
193
500
1200
1595
298
94
200
2220
203
666-746
30
835
1600
1336
550
193
500
1200
1595
298
94
200
2220
203
708-786
35
948
1990
1726
550
200
600
1400
1985
392
153
295
2446
240
956-1070
40
948
1990
1726
550
200
600
1400
1985
392
153
295
2446
240
1006-1120
50
1050
2318
–
570
150
800
1600
2253
423
115
360
2670
–
1294-1418
60
1050
2318
–
570
150
800
1600
2253
423
115
360
2670
–
1374-1498
70
1275
2637
–
570
164
1000
1800
2640
319
161
419
3120
–
2059-2211
80
1275
2637
–
570
164
1000
1800
2640
319
161
419
3120
–
2159-2435
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
GOLD 100/120
137
M
56*
N
N
O
P
GOLD
GOLD
P
GOLD
45
56
122
1048
1000
77
1048
77
3186
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
Size
A
B
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Weight, kg
100
1126
3340
1070
191
1200
2400
3440
520
210
470
3322
800
170
2500
1720
3540-3900
120
1126
3340
1070
191
1200
2400
3440
520
210
470
3322
800
170
2500
1720
3746-4168
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
103
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
10.2 Dimensions, GOLD PX one-piece air handling unit
with plate heat exchanger
GOLD 04/05, 07/08
403
16
91
52*
GOLD
91
GOLD
180
52
52
32
32
50
50
80
80
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
GOLD 11/12
K
403
16
K
52*
91
91
GOLD
GOLD
GOLD
J
50
50
E
52
E
52
50
J
50
80
D
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
GOLD 14/20, 25/30
403
M
M
91
N
GOLD
GOLD
E
52
E
50
50
52
80
D
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
Size
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Ø
Weight, kg
04/05
800
825
240
345
–
230
460
920
–
–
–
2000
–
–
315
291-337
07
915
995
277,5
440
–
271
543
1085
–
–
–
2230
–
–
400
360-419
08
915
995
277,5
440
–
271
543
1085
–
–
–
2230
–
–
400
369-428
11
655
1199
324
1200
397
324
647
1295
–
935
551
2510
–
–
500
552-646
12
655
1199
324
1200
397
324
647
1295
–
935
551
2510
–
–
500
574-668
14
765
1400
1136
1300
450
400
1000
1395
298
188
200
2830
208
109
–
667-773
20
765
1400
1136
1300
450
400
1000
1395
298
188
200
2830
208
109
–
703-809
25
835
1600
1336
1550
575
500
1200
1595
298
203
200
3220
193
94
–
905-1058
30
835
1600
1336
1550
575
500
1200
1595
298
203
200
3220
193
94
–
945-1098
104
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
10.3 Dimensions, GOLD CX once-piece unit
with coil heat exchangers
GOLD 35/40
N
GOLD
GOLD
N
250
50
50
52
52
50
50
250
M
M
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
The dimension print shows the connection configuration for fan arrangement 1.
For fan arrangement 2 the connections are mirror-inverted.
GOLD 50/60
28*
GOLD
GOLD
28
76
76
254
M
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
GOLD 70/80
27
52*
GOLD
GOLD
52
76
254
76
M
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
Size
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Weight, kg
35
948
1990
1726
680
200
600
1400
1985
392
153
295
2575
650
240
1191-1305
40
948
1990
1726
680
200
600
1400
1985
392
153
295
2575
650
240
1241-1355
50
1050
2318
–
760
150
800
1600
2253
423
115
360
2860
700
–
1841-1965
60
1050
2318
–
760
150
800
1600
2253
423
115
360
2860
700
–
1921-2045
70
1275
2637
–
760
164
1000
1800
2640
319
161
419
3310
850
–
2794-2946
80
1275
2637
–
760
164
1000
1800
2640
319
161
419
3310
850
–
2894-3170
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
105
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
GOLD 100/120
137
M
56*
N
N
O
P
GOLD
GOLD
P
45
56
1048
122
1000
77
1048
3186
77
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
Size
A
B
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Weight, kg
100
1126
3340
1070
191
1200
2400
3440
520
210
470
3322
800
170
2500
1720
4126-4486
120
1126
3340
1070
191
1200
2400
3440
520
210
470
3322
800
170
2500
1720
4332-4754
106
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
10.4 Dimensions, separate GOLD SD
supply air and extract air handling units
GOLD 04/05, 07/08
L
B
E
12
16
A
D
H
E
16
C
* If a duct accessory housed in an insulated
casing will be connected, the air handling unit is
supplied with an end connection panel designed
for connection to the duct accessory.
D
GOLD
Ø
100
Ø
52*
F
F
Size
12
L
B
H
A
Base beams are optional.
50
G
C
50
D
E
F
G
Ø
Weight, kg
04/05
1099
825
490
937
162
245
412,5
102
561
315
105-119
07
1174
995
575
1012
162
287,5
497,5
73
730
400
113-133
08
1174
995
575
1012
162
287,5
497,5
73
730
400
117-137
GOLD 11/12
L1
I
16
L2
F
G
162
16
E
D
J
GOLD
GOLD
52*
112
100
52
50
52*
52
Fan
* The air handling unit is supplied without end
connection panel if a duct accessory housed in
L2 casing will be connected.
an insulated
Fan + Coil heat exchanger
B
L1
I
12
16
G
162
16
E
J
Ø
H
F
Size
GOLD
100
50
A
50
D
52
52*
52
GOLD
Weight, kg
fan+filter
11
150-176
12
161-187
Weight, kg
fan + filter + coil
52*
112
269-295
280-306
Size
L1
L2
B
H
A
D
E
F
G
I
J
Ø
11/12
1404
1961
1199
648
935
609
1352
540
650
599,5
324
500
GOLD 14/20
L1
12
21
21
L2
F
208
21
E
C
L3
D
E
C
21
J
F H
GOLD
GOLD
GOLD
J
100
50
52
52*
Fan
Fan + Filter
B
G
I
Fan + Filter + Coil heat exchanger
L1
12
21
21
F
L2 in an insulated casing will be connected,
L3
* If a duct accessory housed
the air handling unit
208 21
E
C
E
D
C
is supplied with an end connection panel designed for connection to the duct accessory.
21
J
Size
F H
A
50
50
Weight, kg
fan+filter
Weight, kg
GOLD + coil
fan + filter
14
169-188
254-292
417-455
20
187-206
272-310
435-473
GOLD
J
100
Weight,kg
fan
GOLD
52
52*
Size
L1
L2
L3
B
H
A
C
D
E
F
G
I
J
14/20
1040
1875
2471
1400
806
1136
988
596
887
400
1000
200
203
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
107
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
GOLD 25/30, 35/40
L1
12
21
L3
L2
F
208 21
E
E
C
D
C
21
J
F
21
GOLD
GOLD
GOLD
H
J
50
100
52
52*
Fan
Fan + filter
B
G
I
Fan + filter + coil heat exchanger
L3
L2
* If aL1duct
accessory
housed in
an insulated
casing
will be connected,
the air handling
unitC
208 21
E
D
E
C
F
is supplied with an end connection panel designed for connection to the duct accessory.
12
21
21
J
F
21
GOLD
A
50
Weight,kg
fan
Weight, kg
fan+filter
Weight, kg
fan + filter + coil
25
241-267
330-382
539-591
30
261-287
350-402
559-611
35
316-350
418-486
689-757
40
341-375
443-511
714-782
GOLD
H
J
50
Size
100
52
52*
Size
L1
L2
L3
B
H
A
C
D
E
F
G
I
J
25/30
1145
1980
2576
1600
1026
1336
1093
596
887
500
1200
200
263
35/40
1145
1980
2576
1990
1126
1726
1093
596
887
600
1400
295
263
GOLD
GOLD 50/60
21
L3
L2
L1
F
E
100
21
21
GOLD
28
E
C
C
D
GOLD
GOLD
28*
100
Fan + filter
Fan
B
G
I
Fan + filter + coil heat exchanger
Supplied on 100 L1mm high support feet. The feetL2can be removed or kept as they are
E
E
F its final100
when the unit is at
location. The unit
has provision
for mounting adjustable
C
21
21
support feet.
12
21
J
GOLD
F H
21
* If a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected, the air handling unit is supplied with an end connection panel designed for connection to the duct accessory.
J
100
45
A
28
GOLD
Size
Weight,kg
fan
Weight, kg
fan+filter
Weight, kg
fan + filter + coil
50
379-410
558-620
978-1040
60
419-450
589-660
1018-1080
28*
Size
L1
L2
L3
A
B
H
C
D
E
F
G
I
J
50/60
1078
1947
2543
2166
2318
1320
1050
618
919
800
1600
359
260
108
www.swegon.com
L3
D
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
C
GOLD
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
GOLD 70/80
21
21
J
L3
L2
L1
F
12
164
21
E
21
GOLD
D
E
C
C
GOLD
GOLD
F H
J
100
52
52*
100
Fan
Fan + filter
B
G
I
Fan + filter + coil heat exchanger
Supplied
on 100164
mm high support
feet. The feetC can be removed orE kept as they D
E
F
21 is at its final location. The unit has provision for mounting
are when the unit
adjustable support feet.
21
21
J
21
GOLD
GOLD
* The air handling unit is supplied without end connection
panel if a duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be
connected.
F H
J
100
45
L3
L2
L1
12
52
A
Size
Weight,kg
fan
Weight, kg
fan+filter
Weight, kg
fan + filter + coil
70
552-590
783-859
1546-1622
80
602-640
833-909
1596-1672
52*
Size
L1
L2
L3
A
B
H
C
D
E
F
G
I
J
70/80
1327
2550
3310
2485
2637
1320
1275
760
1275
1000
1800
419
160
GOLD 100/120
L2
K
L1
I
N
137
21
J
K
56
21
C
M
E
191
C
21
GOLD
L3
D
E
C
GOLD
GOLD
F H
J
100
77
56*
Section for power conn. + fan
Filter + section for power conn. + fan
I
N
Filter + coil heat exchanger + fan
L2
K
L1
B
G
O
I
N
56
21
137
21
J
K
C
M
E
191
C
E
21
* The air handling unit is supplied
without end connection panel if a
duct accessory housed in an insulated casing will be connected.
GOLD
GOLD
F H
Size
122
77
1048
45
J
100
1000
3186
1048
77
Weight, kg
section for power conn.+fan
Weight, kg
filter+section for power conn.+fan
Weight, kg,
filter+coil+fan
100
899-1079 56*
1428-1608
2063-2243
120
1002-1213
1531-1742
2166-2377
Size
L1
L2
L3
B
H
C
D
E
F
G
I
J
K
M
N
O
100/120
1682
2752
3322
3340
1620
1126
1070
1126
1200
2400
470
210
500
800
170
2500
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
109
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
10.5 Connection to wiring terminals
1
A
2 3
4 5
6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17
B GND +
+
+
+
+
+
- +
Com 1 Com 2 Com 3 Com 4 Com 5 SA Temp
Heat
18 19
+
Cool
The max. permissible load on the corresponding connection is 16 VA.
20 21
C NO
22 23
C NO
24 25
C NO
26 27
C NO
28 29 30
31 32
P G G0
G G0
24V AC
SD
WLAN
CPU 2
CPU 1
Glass fuse, 3.15A
Sensor 1 Sensor 2 Sensor 3 Sensor 4
Com 6
Com 7
+
33 34
Com 8 Com 9 Com 10 Com 11
G G0 Y U 24V AC In 18V AC In
35 36 37 38
39 40 41 42
230V AC Out 230V AC In
43 44
45 46 47
Digital inputs, terminals 4-17, are of extra-low voltage type. Analogue input, terminals 18-19 have an input impedance of 66 kΩ.
Wiring
Function
terminal
Remarks
1,2,3
Connections for EIA -485
1= Communication connection A/RT+, 2= Communication connection B/RT–, 3= GND/COM.
4,5
External stop
Stops the air handling unit by opening the circuit. On delivery, this function is fitted with a jumper. If
the connection is interrupted, the air handling unit will stop.
6,7
External fire/smoke function 1
External fire and smoke function. On delivery, this function is fitted with a jumper. If the connection is
interrupted, the function will trip and initiate an alarm.
8,9
External fire/smoke function 2
External fire and smoke function. On delivery, this function is fitted with a jumper. If the connection is
interrupted, the function will trip and initiate an alarm.
10,11
External alarm 1
External contact function. Optional: Normally open/normally closed.
12,13
External alarm 2
External contact function. Optional: Normally open/normally closed.
14,15
External low speed
External contact function. Oversteers the timer from stop to low speed operation.
16,17
External high speed
External contact function. Oversteers the timer from stop or low speed to high speed operation.
18,19
Demand control
Input for 0-10 VDC. The input signal influences the supply air/extract airflow set point if the unit is
operating in the demand control mode. For connection of a sensor, for example CO2, CO and VOC
20,21
Circulation pump, heating circuit
Independent contact, max. 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Closes on a heating load.
22,23
Circulation pump, cooling circuit or
cooling on/off, 1-step operation
Independent contact, max. 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Closes on a cooling load.
24,25
Cooling, on/off, 2-step operation
Independent contact, max. 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Closes on a cooling load.
26,27
In-operation indication
Independent contact, max. 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Closes when the unit is operating.
28,29,30
Damper control
24 VAC. 28= Controlled 24 VAC (G), 29= 24 VAC (G), 30= 24 VAC (G0).
31,32
Control voltage 1)
24 VAC control voltage. Terminals 31-32 are loaded with a total of 16 VA. Opened by means of the
safety isolating switch.
33,34
Reference voltage
Output for constant 10 VDC. Max. permissible load: 8 mA.
35,36,37,38 Control, recirculation damper
The recirculation damper can be loaded with max. 2 mA at 10 VDC. 35= 24 V AC (G), 36= 24 V AC (G0),
37= 0-10 V DC control signal, 38= 0-10 VDC feedback signal.
The max permissible common load on terminals 31-32, outputs for Heat/Cool and damper output (terminals 28-30) is 50 VA.
GOLD 100/120: If more than 16 VA is required, use wiring terminals 201 (G) and 202 (G0). Terminals 201-202 can be loaded with a total of max.
48 VA.
1)
110
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
10.6 Electrical data
10.6.1 Air handling unit
MIN. POWER SUPPLY, ONE-PIECE GOLD UNIT WITH ROTARY (RX),
PLATE (PX) OR COIL (CX) HEAT EXCHANGER.
GOLD 04:
1-phase, 3-wire, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT or
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 05, capacity variant 1:
1-phase, 3-wire, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT or
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 05, capacity variant 2:
1-phase, 3-wire, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 16 AT or
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 07, capacity variant 1:
1-phase, 3-wire, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT or
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 07, capacity variant 2:
1-phase, 3-wire, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 16 AT or
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 08, capacity variant 1:
1-phase, 3-wire, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 16 AT or
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 08, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 11, capacity variant 1:
1-phase, 3-wire, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 16 AT or
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 11, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 12, capacity variant 1 and 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 14, capacity variant 1 and 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 20, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 20, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 16 AT
GOLD 25, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 25, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 16 AT
GOLD 30, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz,
20 AT (RX), 16 AT (PX)
GOLD 30, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 20 AT
GOLD 35, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 20 AT
GOLD 35, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 20 AT (RX), 25 AT (CX)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GOLD 40, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 20 AT
GOLD 40, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 25 AT (RX), 32 AT (CX)
GOLD 50, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz,
20 AT (RX), 25 AT (CX)
GOLD 50, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 32 AT
GOLD 60, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz,
32 AT (RX), 40 AT (CX)
GOLD 60, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 50 AT
GOLD 70, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz,
32 AT (RX), 40 AT (CX)
GOLD 70, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz,
50 AT (RX), 63 AT (CX)
GOLD 80, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz,
50 AT (RX), 63 AT (CX)
GOLD 80, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 80 AT
GOLD 100, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz,
50 AT (RX), 63 AT (CX)
GOLD 100, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 80 AT
GOLD 120, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 80 AT
GOLD 120, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 125 AT
www.swegon.com
111
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
MIN. POWER SUPPLY, SEPARATE SUPPLY AIR AND EXTRACT AIR
HANDLING UNITS, GOLD (SD)
GOLD 04:
1-phase, 3-wire, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 05, capacity variant 1:
1-phase, 3-wire, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 05, capacity variant 2:
1-phase, 3-wire, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 07, capacity variant 1:
1-phase, 3-wire cable, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 07, capacity variant 2:
1-phase, 3-wire cable, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 08, capacity variant 1:
1-phase, 3-wire cable, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 08, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 11, capacity variant 1:
1-phase, 3-wire cable, 230 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 11, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 12–35:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 40, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 40, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 16 AT
GOLD 50, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 10 AT
GOLD 50, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 16 AT
GOLD 60, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 16 AT
GOLD 60, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 25 AT
GOLD 70, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 16 AT
GOLD 70, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 25 AT
GOLD 80, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 25 AT
GOLD 80, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 40 AT
GOLD 100, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 25 AT
GOLD 100, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 40 AT
GOLD 120, capacity variant 1:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 40 AT
GOLD 120, capacity variant 2:
3-phase, 5-wire, 400 V -10/+15%, 50 Hz, 63 AT
112
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
10.6.2 Fans
RATED DATA PER FAN
GOLD 04: Motor shaft power: 0.8 kW (0.41 kW)*, motor controller: 1 x 230 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 05: alt.
Motor shaft power: 0.8 kW,
motor controller: 1 x 230 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 1.15 kW, motor controller: 1 x 230 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 07: alt.
Motor shaft power: 0.8 kW,
motor controller: 1 x 230 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 1.15 kW, motor controller: 1 x 230 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 08: alt.
Motor shaft power: 1.15 kW, motor controller: 1 x 230 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 1.6 kW,
3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 11: alt.
Motor shaft power: 1.15 kW, motor controller: 1 x 230 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 1.6 kW,
3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 12: alt.
Motor shaft power: 1.6 kW, motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 2.4 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 14: alt.
Motor shaft power: 1.6 kW, motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 2.4 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 20: alt.
Motor shaft power: 2.4 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 3.4 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 25: alt.
Motor shaft power: 2.4 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 3.4 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 30: alt.
Motor shaft power: 4.0 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 5.0 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 35: alt.
Motor shaft power: 4.0 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 5.0 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 40: alt.
Motor shaft power: 5.0 kW (3.9 kW)*,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 6.5 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 50: alt.
Motor shaft power: 2 x 2.4 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 3.4 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 60: alt.
Motor shaft power: 2 x 4.0 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 2 x 6.5 kW, motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GOLD 70: alt.
Motor shaft power: 2 x 4.0 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 2 x 6.5 kW, motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 80: alt.
Motor shaft power: 2 x 6.5 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
Motor shaft power: 2 x 10 kW, motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 100: M
otor shaft power: 2 x 6.5 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
alt. Motor shaft power: 2 x 10 kW, motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
GOLD 120: M
otor shaft power: 3 x 6.5 kW,
motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
alt. Motor shaft power: 3 x 10 kW, motor controller: 3 x 400 V, 50 Hz
*) The motor controller limits the output power to the value
specified.
10.6.3 Electrical equipment cubicle
Fuse protection for the air handling unit must not exceed the
value stated in Section 10.6.1.
SAFETY ISOLATING SWITCH
Capacity variant 1
GOLD RX/PX/SD 04-11: 20 A
GOLD RX/PX/CX 12-35 andGOLD SD 12-100: 25 A
GOLD CX 40:32 A
GOLD RX 40-100, GOLD CX 50-100 and
GOLD SD 120: 63 A
GOLD RX/CX 120: 80 A
Capacity variant 2
GOLD RX/PX/SD 05-07:
20 A
GOLD RX/PX 08-35 and GOLD SD 08-70: 25 A
GOLD CX 35-40:32 A
GOLD SD 80-100:40 A
GOLD RX 40-70, GOLD CX 50-70 and
GOLD SD 120:
63 A
GOLD RX/CX 80-100: 80 A
GOLD RX/CX 120160 A
www.swegon.com
113
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
FUSES IN THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CUBICLE
230 V control current
Circulation pump
All sizes/variants:
One 2-pole, 6A automatic circuit breaker
GOLD CX 35-60:
1 pc. 1.8A
Fans
GOLD CX 70-120:
1 pc. 2.35A
GOLD 04-07, GOLD 08, capacity variant 1,
GOLD 11 capacity variant 1
Two 2-pole, 10A automatic circuit breakers
RX/PX
One 2-pole, 10A automatic circuit breaker
SD
GOLD 08, capacity variant 2, GOLD 11, capacity variant
2, GOLD 12-14, GOLD 20, capacity variant 1, GOLD 25
capacity variant 1:
Two 6.3A protective motor switches
RX/PX
One 6.3A protective motor switch
SD
GOLD 20, capacity variant 2, GOLD 25 capacity variant 2:
Two 7.0A protective motor switches
RX/PX
One 7.0A protective motor switch
SD
GOLD 30, capacity variant 1, GOLD 35 capacity variant 1:
Two 8.4A protective motor switches
RX/PX
One 8.4A protective motor switch
SD
GOLD 30, capacity variant 2, GOLD 35 capacity variant 2:
Two 10.6A protective motor switches
RX/CX
One 10.6A protective motor switch
SD
GOLD 40 capacity variant 1:
Two 10.0A protective motor switches
RX/CX
One 10.0A protective motor switch
SD
GOLD 40 capacity variant 2:
Two 13.2A protective motor switches
RX/CX
One 13.2A protective motor switch
SD
GOLD 50, GOLD 60 capacity variant 1, GOLD 70 capacity
variant 1:
Four 10A protective motor switches
RX/CX
Two 10A protective motor switches
SD
GOLD 60 capacity variant 2, GOLD 70 capacity variant 2,
GOLD 80 capacity variant 1, GOLD 100 capacity variant
1:
Four 13.2A protective motor switches
RX/CX
Two 13.2A protective motor switches
SD
Motor and motor controller of the rotary heat exchanger
GOLD RX, standard rotor, sizes 100-120 and
GOLD RX, Recosorptic rotor, sizes 50-120:
1 pc. 2-pole, 6A automatic circuit breaker
FUSES IN THE CONTROL UNIT
3.15 AT, incoming 230V. For mounting, see Section 10.5. For
replacement, dismantle the control unit's plastic enclosure.
10.6.4 Motor in rotary heat exchanger
10.6.4.1 Standard rotor
GOLD RX 04-30: Stepping motor, 2 Nm
On starting max. 6.0 A/77 W. During operation max. 5 A/69 W.
GOLD RX 35-40: Stepping motor, 4 Nm
On starting max. 9.6 A/146 W. During operation max. 8A/130W.
GOLD RX 50-80: Stepping motor, 6 Nm
On starting max. 12 A/220 W. During operation max. 10A/195W.
GOLD RX 100-120: 3-phase step motor.
Max 4.5 A/380 W.
10.6.4.2 Recosorptic rotor
GOLD RX 04-20: Stepping motor, 2 Nm
On starting: max. 6.0 A/77 W. During operation: max. 5 A/69 W.
GOLD RX 25-40: Stepping motor, 4 Nm
On starting: max. 9.6A/146W. During operation: max. 8A/130W.
GOLD RX 50-120: 3-phase stepping motor.
Max 4.5 A/380 W.
10.6.5 Control inaccuracy
Temperature ± 1oC.
Airflow ± 5%.
GOLD 80 capacity variant 2, GOLD 100 capacity variant
2:
Four 13.2A protective motor switches +
RX/CX
SD
Four 13.2A protective motor switches
Two 13.2A protective motor switches +
Two 13.2A protective motor switches
GOLD 120 capacity variant 1:
Six 13.2A protective motor switches
RX/CX
Three 13.2A protective motor switches
SD
GOLD 120 capacity variant 2:
Six 13.2A protective motor switches +
RX/CX
SD
114
Six 13.2A protective motor switches
Three 13.2A protective motor switches +
Three 13.2A protective motor switches
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
(Great Britain)
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
11. Appendices
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FOR THE MACHINERY
Original
11.1 Declaration of Conformity
Directive 2006/42/EC
Swegon AB
Box 300
S-535 23 Kvänum, Sweden
declare under our own sole responsibility that
Air handling units with the following designation:
GOLD RX, GOLD PX, GOLD CX, GOLD LP, GOLD SD
and any accessories to the respective designation covered by these directives
comply with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
and also to the following directives
2004/108/EG EMC, (Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive)
2006/95/EG LVD, (Low voltage directive)
The following harmonised standards have been applied:
EN ISO 12100:2010 (Machinery safety – General principle for design – Risk assessment
and risk reduction)
EN ISO 13857:2008 (Safety of Machinery -, Safety distances from machinery to prevent
hazard zones being reached by upper and lower limbs)
EN 60204-1 (Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines)
EN 61000-6-2, -3 (Electromagnetic compatibility)
EN 61800-3 (Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems)
The following other standards and specifications have been applied:
EN 1886:2007 (Ventilation for buildings, air handling units – Mechanical performance)
EN 13053:2006 (Ventilation for buildings, air handling units - Rating and performance for
units, components and sections)
Person authorised to compile the technical documentation:
Dan Örtengren
Box 300
SE-535 23 Kvänum, Sweden
This declaration is applicable only if the air handling unit(s) has/have been installed
according to Swegon’s instructions and provided that the air handling unit(s) has/have not
been modified in any way.
Kvänum, 01/28/2011
Thord Gustafsson, Quality and Environmental Manager, Swegon AB
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
115
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
11.2 Commissioning Record
Is also available in digital form at www.swegon.com
Company
Our reference
Client
Date
SO No.
Plant
Project/Air handling unit
Subject no:
Plant address
Type/size
Program version:
Filter calibration performed
Timer, current time preset
Other controls
116
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Airflow
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Airflow
Regulation mode
Supply air
X Airflow
X Airflow
Extract air
Operation level
Flow, low speed
Flow, high speed
Flow, max speed
Flow, min. speed
Pressure, low speed
Pressure, high speed
Max. fan speed
Pressure, max speed
Demand, low speed
Demand, high speed
Optimize
Optimize
Set point displacement
Supply air
Extract air
Unit
Unit
Outdoor air comp.
Outdoor air comp.
SA
EA
SA
EA
SA
EA
SA
EA
SA (Pa)
EA (Pa)
SA (Pa)
EA (Pa)
SA (%)
EA (%)
SA (Pa)
EA (Pa)
SA (%)
Duct press
Dem.
Slave
Airflow
Duct press
Dem.
Slave
Duct press
Dem.
Slave
Airflow
Duct press
Dem.
Slave
m3/h
cfm
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
100
100
200
200
100%
100%
200
200
25
EA (%)
SA (%)
EA (%)
25
50
50
On
X Off
On
Off
On
On
X Off
X Off
On
On
Off
Off
l/s
X m3/s
l/s
m3/s
m3/h
cfm
X Inactive
Low speed
High Speed
Low speed and high speed
-20°C
-10°C
+20°C
+20°C
Inactive
Low speed
High Speed
Low speed and high speed
X1, breakp., outd. temp. °C
X2, breakp., outd. temp. °C
X3, breakp., outd. temp. °C
X4, breakp., outd. temp. °C
Supply air, flow
Y1, breakp., supply air
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
Y2, breakp., supply air
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
Y3, breakp., supply air
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
Y4, breakp., supply air
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
Extract air, flow
Y1, breakp., extract air
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
Y2, breakp., extract air
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
Y3, breakp., extract air
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
Y4, breakp., extract air
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
1) Low speed = 25%, high speed = 50% and max. speed = 75 % of max. flow, see Section 5.3.1.2
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
117
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Supply air, pressure
Y1, breakp., supply air
Y2, breakp., supply air
Y3, breakp., supply air
Y4, breakp., supply air
Extract air, pressure
Y1, breakp., extract air
Y2, breakp., extract air
Y3, breakp., extract air
Y4, breakp., extract air
Booster diffusers
Booster diffusers
118
www.swegon.com
Factory-preset value
Pa
Pa
Pa
Pa
100
100
100
100
Pa
Pa
Pa
Pa
100
100
100
100
On
X Off
Adjusted value
On
Off
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Temperature
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Temperature
Regulation mode
Position
Xzone mode
Settings
ERS 1
Extract related supply air-1 step
Extract related supply air-1 diff
Extract related supply air-1 break point
Xzone, Extract air related supply air – 1 step
Xzone, Extract air related supply air – 1 diff.
Xzone, Extr. air rel. supply air – 1 break point
ERS 2
Extract air temperature
Extract related supply air-2 X1
Extract related supply air-2 X2
Extract related supply air-2 X3
Extract related supply air-2 X4
Xzone, Extract air related supply air – 2 X1
Xzone, Extract air related supply air – 2 X2
Xzone, Extract related supply air – 2 X3
Xzone, Extract air related supply air – 2 X4
Supply air temperature set point
Extract related supply air-2 Y1
Extract related supply air-2 Y2
Extract related supply air-2 Y3
Extract related supply air-2 Y4
Xzone, Extract air related supply air – 2 Y1
Xzone, Extract air related supply air – 2 Y2
Xzone, Extract air related supply air – 2 Y3
Xzone, Extract air related supply air – 2 Y4
Supply air regulation
Supply air (temp. set point)
Xzone, Supply air (temp. set point)
Extract air regulation
Extract air (temp. set point)
Supply air, min.
Supply air, max.
Xzone, Extract air (temp. set point)
Xzone, Supply air, min.
Xzone, Supply air, max.
K
°C
2
3
22
2
3
22
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
15
20
22
22
15
20
22
22
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
20
18
14
12
20
18
14
12
°C
°C
21
21
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
21
16
28
21
16
28
K
°C
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
ERS 1
ERS 2
X Supply air
ERS 1
ERS 2
Supply air
Extr. air
ORS
Extr. air
ORS
ORE
ERS 1
ERS 2
ORE
X Supply air
ERS 1
ERS 2
Supply air
Extr. air
ORS
Extr. air
ORS
ORE
ORE
www.swegon.com
119
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
ORS regulation
Outdoor air temperature
Outdoor related supply air X1
Outdoor related supply air X2
Outdoor related supply air X3
Outdoor related supply air X4
Xzone, Outdoor air related supply air X1
Xzone, Outdoor air related supply air X2
Xzone, Outdoor air related supply air X3
Xzone, Outdoor air related supply air X4
Supply air temperature set point
Outdoor related supply air Y1
Outdoor related supply air Y2
Outdoor related supply air Y3
Outdoor related supply air Y4
Xzone, Outdoor air related supply air Y1
Xzone, Outdoor air related supply air Y2
Xzone, Outdoor air related supply air Y3
Xzone, Outdoor air related supply air Y4
ORE regulation
Outdoor air temperature
Outdoor related extract air X1
Outdoor related extract air X2
Outdoor related extract air X3
Outdoor related extract air X4
Xzone, Outdoor air related extract air X1
Xzone, Outdoor air related extract air X2
Xzone, Outdoor air related extract air X3
Xzone, Outdoor air related extract air X4
Extract air temperature set point
Outdoor related extract air Y1
Outdoor related extract air Y2
Outdoor related extract air Y3
Outdoor related extract air Y4
Xzone, Outdoor air related extract air Y1
Xzone, Outdoor air related extract air Y2
Xzone, Outdoor air related extract air Y3
Xzone, Outdoor air related extract air Y4
Set point displacement
Set point displacement
Neutral zone
Supply air neutral zone
Extract air neutral zone
Xzone Supply air neautral zone
Xzone Extract air neautral zone
External temperature sensors
Extract air duct, temperature sensor
Room sensor 1
Room sensor 2
Room sensor 3
Room sensor 4
120
www.swegon.com
Factory-preset value
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
-20°C
-10°C
10°C
20°C
-20°C
-10°C
10°C
20°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
-20°C
-10°C
10°C
20°C
-20°C
-10°C
10°C
20°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
21.5°C
On
K
K
K
K
X Off
Adjusted value
On
Off
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
On
On
On
On
On
X
X
X
X
X
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
External temperature sensors
Room sensor mode
Room temp from communication
Outdoor air sensor 1
Outdoor air sensor 2
Outdoor air sensor 3
Outdoor air sensor 4
Outdoor air sensor mode
Outdoor temp from communication
Xzone room sensor 1
Xzone Room sensor 2
Xzone Room sensor 3
Xzone room sensor 4
Xzone, Room sensor function
Xzone, Room temp. from communication
Regulation sequence
Heat mode
Cool mode
Min. exhaust air
Min. exhaust air
Min. exhaust air temperature
°C
Morning Boost
Morning Boost
Start time
hh:mm.
Supply air, set point
Heating boost
Heating boost
Start limit
Cooling boost
Cooling boost
Start limit (Comfort)
Intermittent night heat
Intermittent night heat
Air recirculation
Room temperature, start
Room temperature, stop
Supply air temperature, set point
Supply airflow, set point
X Medium
On
On
On
On
On
X Medium
On
On
On
On
On
X Medium
On
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Min.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Min.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Min.
Off
Adjusted value
Max.
Max.
Max.
On
5.0
X Off
X Off
On
00:00
50% of max. supply air for AHU alt. 100
Pa
X Off
K
3
K
X Inactive
Comfort
Economy
Sequence
Comfort and economy
Economy and sequence
3
Extract air flow, set point
Summer night cool
Summer night cool
Start time
hh:mm
Stop time
hh:mm
Outdoor air start
°C
Extract air start
°C
Extract air stop
°C
Supply air, set point
°C
Down regulation (airflow/pressure)
Down regulation
Min.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Min.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Min.
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Max.
Max.
Max.
1
1
On
°C
°C
°C
Medium
On
On
On
On
On
Medium
On
On
On
On
On
Medium
On
X Off
On
X On
Off
16
18
28
50% of max. supply air for AHU alt. 100
Pa
Inactive
Comfort
Economy
Sequence
Comfort and economy
Economy and sequence
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
50% of max. supply air for AHU alt. 100
Pa
On
23:00
06:00
10
22
16
10
X Off
Inactive X Supply air
Supply and extract air
Neutral
K
0.0
We
reservezone
the right to alter specifications without
notice.
Inactive
Supply air
Supply and extract air
www.swegon.com
121
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Time and
schedule
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Time and Schedule
Schedule settings
Preselected operating mode
Effective period
Start date
Start date
Stop date
Stop date
Day schedule
Monday
Time, Event 1
Event 1
Time, Event 2
Event 2
Time, Event 3
Event 3
Time, Event 4
Event 4
Time, Event 5
Event 5
Time, Event 6
Event 6
X Low speed High Speed
Total stop
Normal Stop
Extended Normal Stop
High Speed
Low speed
Extended Normal Stop
X On
Enabled
Off
X Inactive
On
Enabled
Off
Inactive
Enabled
X Inactive
Enabled
Inactive
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
122
Total stop
Normal Stop
www.swegon.com
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Tuesday
Time, Event 1
Event 1
Time, Event 2
Event 2
Time, Event 3
Event 3
Time, Event 4
Event 4
Time, Event 5
Event 5
Time, Event 6
Event 6
Factory-preset value
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Wednesday
Time, Event 1
Event 1
Time, Event 2
Event 2
Time, Event 3
Event 3
Time, Event 4
Event 4
Time, Event 5
Event 5
Time, Event 6
Event 6
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Adjusted value
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
www.swegon.com
123
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Thursday
Time, Event 1
Event 1
Time, Event 2
Event 2
Time, Event 3
Event 3
Time, Event 4
Event 4
Time, Event 5
Event 5
Time, Event 6
Event 6
Factory-preset value
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Friday
Time, Event 1
Event 1
Time, Event 2
Event 2
Time, Event 3
Event 3
Time, Event 4
Event 4
Time, Event 5
Event 5
Time, Event 6
Event 6
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
124
www.swegon.com
Adjusted value
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Saturday
Time, Event 1
Event 1
Time, Event 2
Event 2
Time, Event 3
Event 3
Time, Event 4
Event 4
Time, Event 5
Event 5
Time, Event 6
Event 6
Factory-preset value
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Sunday
Time, Event 1
Event 1
Time, Event 2
Event 2
Time, Event 3
Event 3
Time, Event 4
Event 4
Time, Event 5
Event 5
Time, Event 6
Event 6
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Adjusted value
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
www.swegon.com
125
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Ex1
Time, Event 1
Event 1
Time, Event 2
Event 2
Time, Event 3
Event 3
Time, Event 4
Event 4
Time, Event 5
Event 5
Time, Event 6
Event 6
Factory-preset value
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Ex2
Time, Event 1
Event 1
Time, Event 2
Event 2
Time, Event 3
Event 3
Time, Event 4
Event 4
Time, Event 5
Event 5
Time, Event 6
Event 6
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
hour:min
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
00:00
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
126
www.swegon.com
Adjusted value
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Exceptions schedule
Exception 1 (Ex1)
Exceptions method
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Y/M/D
Date range
Start date
Start weekday
Y/M/D
Stop date
Stop weekday
Inactive
Date range
X Calendar 1
Date
Weekday
Calendar 2
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Adjusted value
Inactive
Date range
Calendar 1
Date
Weekday
Calendar 2
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Month 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Weekday
Start date
Start weekday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
www.swegon.com
127
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Exception 2 (Ex2)
Exception method
Inactive
Date range
Calendar 1
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Y/M/D
Date range
Start date
Start weekday
Y/M/D
Stop date
Stop weekday
Adjusted value
Date
Weekday
X Calendar 2
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Start weekday
Calendar 1
Function 1
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
X Inactive
Date range
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Date
Weekday
Inactive
Date range
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Start weekday
128
Date
Weekday
Calendar 2
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Weekday
Start date
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Inactive
Date range
Calendar 1
www.swegon.com
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Function 2
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
X Inactive
Date range
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Start weekday
Inactive
Date range
Date
Weekday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Inactive
Date range
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Function 3
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
Start weekday
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Adjusted value
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
X Inactive
Date range
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
www.swegon.com
129
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Function 4
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
X Inactive
Date range
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Date
Weekday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Inactive
Date range
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
X Inactive
Date range
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Start weekday
130
Inactive
Date range
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Function 5
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
Start weekday
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Adjusted value
www.swegon.com
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Function 6
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
X Inactive
Date range
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Start weekday
Inactive
Date range
Date
Weekday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Inactive
Date range
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Function 7
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
Start weekday
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Adjusted value
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
X Inactive
Date range
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
www.swegon.com
131
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Function 8
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
X Inactive
Date range
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Date
Weekday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Inactive
Date range
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
X Inactive
Date range
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
X
Wednesday
Saturday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Start weekday
132
Inactive
Date range
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Function 9
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
Start weekday
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Adjusted value
www.swegon.com
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Function 10
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
X Inactive
Date range
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Start weekday
Inactive
Date range
Date
Weekday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Calendar 2
Function 1
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
Start weekday
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Adjusted value
X Inactive
Date range
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Date
Weekday
Inactive
Date range
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
X
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
www.swegon.com
133
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Function 2
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
X Inactive
Date range
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Date
Weekday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Inactive
Date range
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
X Inactive
Date range
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Start weekday
134
Inactive
Date range
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Function 3
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
Start weekday
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Adjusted value
www.swegon.com
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Function 4
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
X Inactive
Date range
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Start weekday
Inactive
Date range
Date
Weekday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Inactive
Date range
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Function 5
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
Start weekday
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Adjusted value
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
X Inactive
Date range
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
www.swegon.com
135
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Function 6
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
X Inactive
Date range
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Date
Weekday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Inactive
Date range
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
X Inactive
Date range
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Start weekday
136
Inactive
Date range
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Function 7
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
Start weekday
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Adjusted value
www.swegon.com
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Function 8
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
X Inactive
Date range
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Start weekday
Inactive
Date range
Date
Weekday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Inactive
Date range
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Function 9
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
Start weekday
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Adjusted value
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
X Inactive
Date range
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Date
Weekday
Tuesday
Friday
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
www.swegon.com
137
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Function 10
Date
Start date
Start weekday
Date range
Start date
Stop date
Weekday
Start date
X Inactive
Date range
Adjusted value
Date
Weekday
Inactive
Date range
Date
Weekday
Y/M/D
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
Mon 1-12
Each
15-21
Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Odd
Day 1-7
22-28
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Even
8-14
29-31
Tuesday
Friday
Y/M/D
Y/M/D
X Each day
Wednesday
Saturday
Start weekday
Prolonged operation
Ext. low speed
hour:min.
Ext. high speed
hour:min.
Monday
Thursday
Sunday
Tuesday
Friday
00:00
00:00
Filters
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Filters
Pre-filter
X Inactive
Supply air
Supply and extract air
X Inactive
Supply air
Supply and extract air
X Off
On
AHU filter (GOLD SD)
End filter
Alarm limits
Supply air pre-filter
Extract air pre-filter
Supply air AHU filter
Extract air AHU filter
Supply air end filter
Pa
Pa
Pa
Pa
Pa
Extract air
Extract air
Inactive
Supply air
Supply and extract air
Inactive
Supply air
Supply and extract air
On
Off
Extract air
Extract air
100
100
100
100
100
Language
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Language
Language
138
www.swegon.com
English
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Alarm settings
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Alarm priorities
Fire alarms
Internal fire alarm
Inernal fire alarm reset
Internal fire alarm after cool
External fire alarm 1 reset
External fire alarm 1 after cool
External fire alarm 2 reset
External fire alarm 2 after cool
Fan operation on an internal fire
alarm
Supply air fan on an int. fire alarm
%
Extract air fan on an int. fire alarm
%
Fan operation on external fire alarm 1
On
X Manual
Active
X Manual
Active
X Manual
Active
X Inactive
Extract air
100
100
X Inactive
Supply air fan on external fire alarm 1 %
Extract air fan on external fire alarm 1 %
Fan operation on external fire alarm 2
Extract air
100
100
X Inactive
Supply air fan on external fire alarm 2 %
Extract air fan on external fire alarm 2 %
Order of priority
Extract air
100
100
X Ext. fire alarm 1
Int. fire alarm
External alarms
External alarm 1 reset
External alarm 1 after cool
External alarm 1 input
External alarm 1 delay time
External alarm 2 reset
External alarm 2 after cool
External alarm 2 input
External alarm 2, time delay
Temperature guard
Temperature guard
Alarm delay
Alarm limit
Temperature alarm limits
Pre-heat below set point
Supply air below set point
Supply air above set point
Extract air below alarm limit
Outdoor temperature limit stop
Service period
Service period
Alarm priority
See alarm list
Manual
s
Active
X Closed circuit
10
s
Manual
Active
X Closed circuit
10
s
°C
30
7
K
K
K
°C
°C
5.0
5.0
7.0
12.0
5.0
On
X Off
Auto
X Inactive
Auto
X Inactive
Auto
X Inactive
Supply air
Supply and extract air
On
Manual
Active
Manual
Active
Manual
Active
Inactive
Extract air
Off
Auto
Inactive
Auto
Inactive
Auto
Inactive
Supply air
Supply and extract air
Supply air
Supply and extract air
Inactive
Extract air
Supply air
Supply and extract air
Supply air
Supply and extract air
Inactive
Extract air
Supply air
Supply and extract air
Ext. fire alarm 2
Automatic
Ext. fire alarm 1
Int. fire alarm
Ext. fire alarm 2
Automatic
Manual
Auto
Open circuit
Active
Closed circuit
Inactive
Open circuit
X Auto
X Inactive
Open circuit
Manual
Active
Closed circuit
Auto
Inactive
Open circuit
X Off
On
Off
X Auto
X Inactive
Mon. 12
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
139
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Log
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Log
Log file period
Log sender active
Live mode
X Inactive
Day
X
On
Off
X E-mail
FTP
E-mail and FTP
Inactive
On
E-mail
E-mail and FTP
Day
Off
FTP
Air handling unit
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Air handling unit
Type of air handling unit
GOLD RX/PX/CX
Name
Fan position 1
Flow chart, supply air fan position
GOLD SD
Name
Flowchart, fan position
140
www.swegon.com
Type of air handling unit supplied, except
the GOLD SD extract air handling unit
X Extract air
Upper level
Upper level
GOLD RX
GOLD CX
GOLD SD FL
GOLD SD TL+FL
GOLD PX
GOLD SD TL
GOLD SD TL+CX
GOLD SD SA+EA+CX
Supply air
X Bottom
Extract air
Upper level
Supply air
Bottom
X Bottom
Upper level
Bottom
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Heat
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Heat
Pre-heat
Pre-heat
Pre-heat set point
°C
Periodic operation pump
Periodic operation valve
Periodic operation interval h
Periodic operation period min.
Alarm input
X Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Alarm on open cont.
Contactor function
Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Alarm on open cont.
Contactor function
Inactive
Cool
On
On
Heat
Heat and cool
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Alarm on open cont.
Contactor function
Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Alarm on open cont.
Contactor function
X On
X On
h
24
min. 3
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
X Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Alarm on open cont.
Contactor function
Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Alarm on open cont.
Contactor function
On
5
X On
X On
24
3
X Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Extra reg. sequence
Extra regulation seq. mode
X Inactive
Cool
Output inverse 10 - 0 V
On
Recirculation control
On
Max. output signal
%
100
Periodic operation pump
X On
Periodic operation valve
X On
Periodic operation interval h
24
Periodic operation period min. 3
Alarm input
X Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Reheat
Air heater for hot water
Periodic operation pump
Periodic operation valve
Periodic operation interval
Periodic operation period
Xzone
Xzone
Air heater for hot water
Periodic operation pump
Periodic operation valve
Periodic operation interval
Periodic operation period
Alarm input
X On
X On
h
24
min. 3
X Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Electric air heater
Post-cooling
Season Heat
Season Heat
Extra reg. sequence
Heat
Heat and cool
X Off
X Off
min. 3
X Inactive
Extra regul.sequence closed cont.
Extra regul.sequence closed cont.
Extra regul.sequence manual
X Off
On
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Inactive
Extra regul.sequence closed cont.
On
Extra regul.sequence closed cont.
Extra regul.sequence manual
Off
www.swegon.com
141
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Cool
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Cool
Extra regulation sequence
Extra regulation sequence
Output inverse 10 - 0 V
Recirculation control
Max. output signal
Periodic operation pump
Periodic operation valve
Periodic operation interval
Periodic operation period
Alarm input
X Inactive
Heating
Cooling
Heating and cooling
X Off
On
X Off
On
%
100
X On
Off
X On
Off
h
24
min. 3
X Inactive
Alarm on open cont.
Alarm on closed cont.
Cool
DX air cooler
Cooling
Air cooler for water
Period. operation pump 1
Period. operation pump 2
Periodic operation valve
Periodic operation interval
Periodic operation period
Xzone
DX air cooler
Cooling
Air cooler for water
Period. operation pump 1
Period. operation pump 2
Periodic operation valve
Periodic operation interval
Periodic operation period
Alarm input 1
X Inactive
3-step, binary
X On
X On
X On
h
24
min. 3
X Inactive
3-step, binary
X On
X On
X On
h
24
min. 3
X Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
X Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Alarm input 2
COOL DX
COOL DX
Delay time
Restart time
Step switch time
Stop/start time
Outdoor air limits
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Air flow limits
Supply air
Extract air
142
www.swegon.com
X Inactive
COOL DX Top
Contactor function
1-step
2-step
Off
Off
Off
1-step
Inactive
Heating
Heating and cooling
On
Off
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Alarm on open cont.
Contactor function
Inactive
3-step, binary
1-step
On
On
On
2-step
Cooling
Inactive
3-step, binary
On
On
On
2-step
Off
Off
Off
1-step
2-step
Off
Off
Off
Alarm on open cont.
Contactor function
Alarm on open cont.
Contactor function
Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Alarm on open cont.
Contactor function
Alarm on open cont.
Contactor function
Economy
Inactive
COOL DX Top
Economy
Comfort
Comfort
min. 5
min. 5
min. 5
°C
°C
°C
15
18
20
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Heat exchanger
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Heat/Cool recovery
Carry over control
Carry over control
Defrosting
Defrosting
Defrosting limit value
Calibration
Pa
On
X Off
On
Off
On
X Off
On
Off
On
X Off
On
Off
50
SMART Link
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
SMART Link
Type of unit
Water
Heated water set point
Heated water diff
Chilled water set point
Chilled water diff
Limit, outdoor temp.
Optimize
Cool. optim, reg. speed
Heat. optim. reg. speed
Valve limit, lower
Valve limit, upper
Delay
AQUA Link
Pump alarm
X Inactive
Water, chiller
DX, heat pump
DX, reversible
Inactive
Water, chiller
DX, heat pump
DX, reversible
Water, heat pump
Water, reversible
DX, chiller
°C
K
°C
K
°C
40
3
12
2
-30
On
0.3
0.3
75
95
60
X Off
On
Off
K/min
K/min
%
%
s
On
X Inactive
Alarm on open contact
X Off
Alarm on closed contact
Contactor function
On
Inactive
Alarm on open contact
Off
Alarm on closed contact
Contactor function
DX (Celest+)
Amount of units
Length of period, com- s
fort mode
Defrost delay
s
Dead band,
K
supply air temp.
Stabilization time
Water, heat pump
Water, reversible
DX, chiller
s
1
1200
180
1,0
240
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
143
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Humidity
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Humidity
Humidifying
Humidifying
X Inactive
0 - 10 V
X Supply air
Location, regulating
humidity sensor
Evaporative
Start limit
Stop limit
Steam
Set point
Max. supply air
Dehumidifying
Dehumidification
%RH
%RH
40
45
%RH
%RH
30
80
Supply air, rel. humidity %RH
Extract air, rel. humidity %RH
Humidifier alarm
Alarm input
On/Off
Extract air
Inactive
0 - 10 V
Supply air
On/Off
Extract air
X Inactive
Extract air
50
50
Supply air
Inactive
Extract air
Supply air
X Inactive
Open circuit
Closed circuit
Contactor function
Inactive
Open circuit
Closed circuit
Contactor function
ReCO2
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
ReCO2
CO2 mode
X Inactive
CO2 air flow boost
X Inactive
Temperature mode
Heat sequence
Inactive
CO2
CO2 and air flow boost
Inactive
Heat sequence
Heat and cool sequence
Cool sequence
Heat and cool sequence
50
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
X Off
On
On
Off
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
25% of max. airflow for air handling unit
X Off
On
On
Off
Cool sequence
CO2
CO2, set point
Min. outdoor air
Min. exhaust air
Calibration
Temperature
Min. outdoor air
Min. exhaust air
Calibration
144
%
www.swegon.com
CO2
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
All Year
Comfort
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
All Year Comfort
Function
Chilled water
Chilled water
Outdoor temp. comp.
Outdoor temp. X1
Outdoor temp. X2
Outdoor temp. X3
Outdoor temp. X4
Chilled water temp. Y1
Chilled water temp Y2
Chilled water temp. Y3
Chilled water temp. Y4
Outd. temp. for pump start
Outd. temp. for pump stop
Room temp. compensation
Room temp. set point
Room temp. P-band
Room comp. night block.
Night compensation
Night reduction
Time channel 1, start night
Time channel 1, end night
Time channel 1, period
Dew point compensation
Air flow compensation
Periodic operation pump
Periodic operation valve
Periodic operation interval
Periodic operation period
Pump alarm
Valve alarm
X Inactive
Heated water
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
K
K
h:min.
h:min.
Inactive
Heated water
Chilled water
Chilled and heated water
14
On
X Off
On
Off
On
X Off
On
Off
On
On
X Off
X Off
On
On
Off
Off
Inactive
Tuesday
Thursday
Saturday
Mon.-Fri.
Sat.-Sun.
On
On
On
On
Monday
Wednesday
Friday
Sunday
Mon.-Sun.
10
20
25
30
22
18
14
12
10
7
21
5
2
00:00
00:00
X Inactive
Tuesday
Thursday
Saturday
Mon.-Fri.
Sat.-Sun.
On
On
h
min.
Chilled water
Chilled and heated water
X On
On
24
3
X Inactive
Monday
Wednesday
Friday
Sunday
Mon.-Sun.
X Off
X Off
Off
X Off
Alarm on closed cont.
Alarm on open contact
Contactor function
X Off
On
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Alarm on open contact
Contactor function
On
Off
www.swegon.com
145
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Heated water
Heated water
Outdoor temp. comp.
Outdoor temperature X1
Outdoor temperature X2
Outdoor temperature X3
Outdoor temperature X4
Heated water temp. Y1
Heated water temp. Y2
Heated water temp. Y3
Heated water temp. Y4
Outd. temp. for pump start
Outd. temp. for pump stop
Room temp. compensation
Room temp. set point
Room temp. P-band
Room comp. night blocking
Night compensation
Night reduction
Time channel 2, start night
Time channel 2, end night
Time channel 2, period
Air flow compensation
Periodic operation pump
Periodic operation valve
Periodic operation interval
Periodic operation period
Pump alarm
Valve alarm
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
°C
30
On
-20
0
5
15
40
30
20
15
15
18
X Off
On
Off
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
On
X Off
On
Off
On
On
X Off
X Off
On
On
Off
Off
Inactive
Tuesday
Thursday
Saturday
Mon.-Fri.
Sat.-Sun.
On
On
On
Monday
Wednesday
Friday
Sunday
Mon.-Sun.
°C
K
K
h:min.
h:min.
21
5
-2
00:00
00:00
X Inactive
Tuesday
Thursday
Saturday
Mon.-Fri.
Sat.-Sun.
On
h
min
X On
On
24
3
X Inactive
Monday
Wednesday
Friday
Sunday
Mon.-Sun.
X Off
Off
X Off
Alarm on closed cont.
Alarm on open contact
Contactor function
X Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Inactive
Alarm on closed cont.
Alarm on open contact
Contactor function
On
Off
MIRU Control
Function
Factory-preset value
MIRU Control
See the commissioning report for MIRU Control
146
www.swegon.com
Adjusted value
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Inputs / Outputs
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Inputs / Outputs
External operation, module 3
Digital
output 1,
operating
mode
See Section 6.4.19
Digital
Output 2,
operating
mode
See Section 6.4.19
Digital
Input 1
Digital
Input 2
Analogue
Input 1
Analogue
Input 2
X Inactive
Stop AYC heating water
X Inactive
Stop AYC heating water
See Section 6.4.19
Alarm reset
Stop AYC chilled water
Alarm reset
Stop AYC chilled water
See Section 6.4.19
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Inactive
AHU in auto op. mode
AHU in low speed op. mode
A-alarm
Damper relay
Heat exchanger, defrost.
Reheat, cap. red.
Morning Boost
Air flow down regulation
Extra reg. sequ., cooling
Cooling Boost
Supply air fan in operation
Inactive
AHU in auto op. mode
AHU in low speed op. mode
A-alarm
Damper relay
Heat exchanger, defrost.
Reheat, cap. red.
Morning Boost
Air flow down regulation
Extra reg. sequ., cooling
Cooling Boost
Supply air fan in operation
Inactive
Stop AYC heating water
Inactive
Stop AYC heating water
Inactive
Set point displ., supply air
Inactive
Set point displ., supply air
Air handling unit in operation
AHU in man. op. mode
AHU in high speed operation
B-alarm
Heat exchange
Re-heat
Heating boost
Intermittent night op.
Extra reg. sequ., heating
Cool
Summer night cool
Extract air fan in operation
Air handling unit in operation
AHU in man. op. mode
AHU in high speed operation
B-alarm
Heat exchange
Re-heat
Heating boost
Intermittent night op.
Extra reg. sequ., heating
Cool
Summer night cool
Extract air fan in operation
Alarm reset
Stop AYC, chilled water
Alarm reset
Stop AYC chilled water
Set point displacement
Set point displ., extract air
Set point displacement
Set point displ., extract air
www.swegon.com
147
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Inputs / Outputs
External operation, module 6
Digital
output 1,
operating
mode
See Section 6.4.19
Digital
Output 2,
operating
mode
See Section 6.4.19
Digital
Input 1
Digital
Input 2
Analogue
Input 1
Analogue
Input 2
X Inactive
Stop AYC heating water
X Inactive
148
Stop AYC heating water
See Section 6.4.19
See Section 6.4.19
www.swegon.com
Alarm reset
Stop AYC chilled water
Alarm reset
Stop AYC chilled water
Inactive
AHU in auto op. mode
AHU in low speed op. mode
A-alarm
Damper relay
Heat exchanger, defrost.
Reheat, cap. red.
Morning Boost
Air flow down regulation
Extra reg. sequ., cooling
Cooling Boost
Supply air fan in operation
Inactive
AHU in auto op. mode
AHU in low speed op. mode
A-alarm
Damper relay
Heat exchanger, defrost.
Reheat, cap. red.
Morning Boost
Air flow down regulation
Extra reg. sequ., cooling
Cooling Boost
Supply air fan in operation
Inactive
Stop AYC heating water
Inactive
Stop AYC heating water
Inactive
Set point displ., supply air
Inactive
Set point displ., supply air
Air handling unit in operation
AHU in man. op. mode
AHU in high speed operation
B-alarm
Heat exchange
Re-heat
Heating boost
Intermittent night op.
Extra reg. sequ., heating
Cool
Summer night cool
Extract air fan in operation
Air handling unit in operation
AHU in man. op. mode
AHU in high speed operation
B-alarm
Heat exchange
Re-heat
Heating boost
Intermittent night op.
Extra reg. sequ., heating
Cool
Summer night cool
Extract air fan in operation
Alarm reset
Stop AYC, chilled water
Alarm reset
Stop AYC chilled water
Set point displacement
Set point displ., extract air
Set point displacement
Set point displ., extract air
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Communication
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Communication
External Port B
DHCP
IP address
Net mask
Standard value GATEWAY
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN
SSID
Password
IP address
Net mask
Channel, frequency band
E-mail
SMTP-server
SMTP server address
SMTP port number
SMTP username
SMTP password
Encryption
E-mail user
E-mail reply path
EIA-485
Protocol
Baudrate
Parity
Stopbits
Modbus ID/Metasys ID/PLA
ELA
Shortest feedback delay ms
Modbus TCP
Port number
Approved client IP address
Approved client netmask
BACnet IP
Network number Ext. B
Internal network number A
Device ID
Port number
EXOline TCP
Port number
PLA
ELA
Op. level communication
Operation level
On
10.200.1.1
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
X Off
On
Off
On
GOLD
123456789
10.0.0.1
255.255.255.0
5
X Off
On
Off
External
Internal
X Off
On
Off
X Modbus
Metasys N2 Open
Inactive
EXOline
LON
4800
19200
None
Modbus
Metasys N2 Open
Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
Total Stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
X External
Internal
25
On
Inactive
EXOline
LON
4800
19200
X None
2
1
1
0
X 9600
38400
Even
odd
9600
38400
Even
odd
502
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0
0
0
47808
26486
1
1
X Inactive
Low speed
Normal Stop
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Total stop
High Speed
Extended Normal Stop
www.swegon.com
149
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Users
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
Users
Requirements for user
password
On
X Off
On
Off
IQnavigator
Function
Factory-preset value
Adjusted value
IQnavigator
Connect to IQlogic
X Direct
Static IP
DHCP
X Auto adjust
Medium
DHCP
Wireless
Direct
Static IP
Low
Auto adjust
Low
Medium
High
On
Off
Wireless
IQnavigator IP address
IQnavigator Netmask
Pre-selected IQnavigator
gateway
IQlogic IP address
Brightness mode
Button sound effects
Volume
150
www.swegon.com
On
High
X Off
3
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Alarm No.
Factory-preset valuee
Priority
Function
0 = Blocked
A = alarm A
Effect
0 = In oper. 0 = Blocked
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
A = A alarm
Effect
0 = In oper.
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
1:1
External fire alarm no. 1 tripped
A1)
1
1:2
External fire alarm no. 2 tripped
A1)
1
1:3
Internal fire alarm tripped
A1)
1
2:1
External alarm no. 1 tripped 2)
A
13)
2:2
External alarm no. 2 tripped 2)
B
03)
3:1
Preheating, I/O module no. 9 communication error
A
3:2
Preheating, overheating protection for electric air heater tripped
03)
A
1)
03)
1)
1
3:3
Pre-heating, frost guard tripped
A
3:4
Pre-heating, frost guard temperature sensor defective
A1)
1
3:5
Pre-heating, temperature sensor defective
A
03)
3:6
Pre-heating, valve monitoring tripped
B
03)
3:7
Pre-heating, temperature below set point alarm limit
A
03)
3:8
Pre-heat, alarm input tripped
A
0
4:1
Extra regulation sequence, I/O module no. E communication error
A
03)
4:2
Extra regulation sequence, overheating protection for electric air heater
tripped
A1)
03)
1
4:3
Extra regulation sequence, frost guard tripped
A1)
4:4
Extra regulation sequence, fost guard temperature sensor defective
A1)
1
4:5
Extra regulation sequence, valve monitoring tripped
B
03)
4:6
Extra regulation sequence, alarm input tripped
A
0
4:10
Extra regulation sequence, temperature protection via communication,
communication error
B
0
5:1
Reheating, overheating protection for electric air heater tripped
A1)
03)
5:2
Reheating, frost guard tripped
A1)
1
5:3
Reheating, frost guard temperature sensor defective
A1)
1
5:4
Reheating, heat valve monitoring tripped
B
03)
6:1
Xzone I/O-module no. A communication error
A
03)
6:2
Xzone, overheating protection for electric air heater tripped
A1)
03)
1
6:3
Xzone, frost guard tripped
A
6:4
Xzone, frost guard temperature sensor defective
A1)
1
6:5
Xzone, supply air temperature sensor defective
A
13)
6:6
Xzone, heating valve monitoring tripped
B
03)
6:7
Xzone, supply air temperature below set point alarm limit
A
03)
6:8
Xzone, supply air temperature above set point alarm limit
B
03)
1)
6:9
Xzone, heat, alarm input tripped
A
0
7:1
Xzone I/O-module no. B communication error
A
03)
7:2
Xzone, extract air temperature sensor defective
A
13)
7:3
Xzone, cooling valve monitoring tripped
B
03)
7:4
Xzone, extract air temperature below set point alarm limit
A
03)
7:5
Xzone, cool, alarm input 1 tripped
A
0
7:6
Xzone, cool, alarm input 2 tripped
A
0
8:5
Cooling, valve monitoring tripped
B
03)
10:1
Supply air temperature sensor defective
A
13)
10:2
Supply air temperature sensor for density compensation defective
B
03)
10:3
Extract air temperature sensor defective
A
13)
10:4
Extract air temperature sensor for density compensation defective
(RX/PX/CX)
B
03)
10:5
Extract air temperature sensor for heat exchanger defrosting defective
A
13)
10:6
Extract air temperature sensor for density compensation in SD AHU defective
A
13)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Adjusted value
Priority
www.swegon.com
151
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Alarm No.
Factory-preset valuee
Priority
Function
0 = Blocked
A = alarm A
Effect
0 = In oper. 0 = Blocked
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
B
03)
11:1
Room temperature sensor no. 1 defective
B
03)
11:2
Room temperature sensor no. 2 defective
B
03)
11:3
Room temperature sensor no. 3 defective
B
03)
11:4
Room temperature sensor no. 4 defective
B
03)
11:5
Xzone, room temperature sensor no. 5 defective
B
03)
11:6
Xzone, room temperature sensor no. 6 defective
B
03)
11:7
Xzone, room temperature sensor no. 7 defective
B
03)
11:8
Xzone, room temperature sensor no. 8 defective
B
03)
11:9
Outdoor temperature sensor no. A defective
B
03)
11:10 Outdoor temperature sensor no. B defective
B
03)
11:11 Outdoor temperature sensor no. C defective
B
03)
B
03)
B
03)
B
03)
B
03)
11:13 Room temperature via communication, communication error
2)
11:14 Xzone, room temperature via communication, communication error
11:15 Outdoor temperature via communication, communication error
2)
2)
12:1
Supply air temperature below set point alarm limit
A
13)
12:2
Supply air temperature above set point alarm limit
B
03)
12:6
Extract air temperature below alarm limit
A
13)
12:11 Temperature guard below alarm limit 2)
A
13)
13:1
Humidification, I/O module no. 4 communication error
B
03)
13:2
Supply air humidity sensor defective
A
03)
13:3
Extract air humidity sensor defective
A
03)
13:9
Humidifier, alarm output tripped
A
03)
13:11 VOC sensor communication error
B
03)
13:12 VOC sensor, internal communication error
B
03)
13:13 VOC sensor, internal error
B
03)
13:14 VOC sensor, level below/above set point alarm limit
B
03)
15:1
plate heat exchanger, I/O module no. 2 communication error
A
13)4)
15:2
Plate heat exchanger, temperature sensor no. 1 defective
A
13)4)
15:3
Plate heat exchanger, temperature sensor no. 2 defective
A
13)4)
15:4
Plate heat exchanger, damper monitoring tripped
A
03)4)
16:1
Coil heat exchanger, I/O module no. 1 communication error
A
13)4)
16:2
Coil heat exchanger, temperature sensor defective
A
13)4)
16:3
Coil heat exchanger, valve monitoring tripped
A
03)4)
16:4
Coil heat exchanger, pump monitoring tripped
A
13)4)
17:1
Rotary heat exchanger, motor controller communication error
A
13)
17:2
Rotary heat exchanger, defrosting pressure sensor no. 7 communication
error
B
03)
17:3
Rotary heat exchanger, defrosting pressure above alarm limit
B
13)4)
17:4
Rotary heat exchanger, rotation detector tripped
A1)
13)4)
17:5
Rotary heat exchanger, motor controller overcurrent
A1)
13)4)
17:6
Rotary heat exchanger, motor controller undervoltage
A1)
13)4)
17:7
Rotary heat exchanger, motor controller overvoltage
A1)
13)4)
17:8
Rotary heat exchanger, motor controller excess temperature
A1)
13)4)
17:9
Rotary heat exchanger, motor controller start up error
A1)
13)4)
18:1
AYC I/O module no. 7 communication error
A
03)
18:2
AYC heating, temperature sensor defective
A
03)
152
www.swegon.com
A = A alarm
Effect
0 = In oper.
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
10:10 Outdoor air temperature sensor defective (GOLD SD)
11:12 Outdoor temperature sensor no. D defective
Adjusted value
Priority
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Alarm No.
Factory-preset valuee
Priority
Function
0 = Blocked
A = alarm A
Effect
0 = In oper. 0 = Blocked
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
AYC heating, valve monitoring tripped
B
03)
18:4
AYC heating, pump monitoring tripped
A
03)
18:5
AYC heating, temperature below set point alarm limit
A
03)
18:6
AYC heating, temperature above set point alarm limit 5)
B
03)
18:9
AYC cooling, temperature sensor defective
A
03)
18:10 AYC cooling, valve monitoring tripped
B
03)
18:11 AYC cooling, pump monitoring tripped
A
03)
A
03)
B
03)
18:13 AYC cooling, temperature above set point alarm limit
5)
21:1
COOL DX, I/O module no. 2 communication error
B
21:2
COOL DX, compressor no. 1 low pressure sensor defective
21:3
0 = In oper.
1 = Stop
03)
A
1)
03)
COOL DX, compressor no. 1 low pressure below alarm limit
A
1)
03)
21:4
COOL DX, compressor no. 1 high pressure sensor defective
A
1)
03)
21:5
COOL DX, compressor no. 1 high pressure above alarm limit
A
1)
03)
21:6
COOL DX, compressor no. 1 monitoring tripped
A
21:7
COOL DX, compressor no. 1 restart error
A
21:8
COOL DX, compressor no. 2 low pressure sensor defective
21:9
03)
03)
A
1)
03)
COOL DX, compressor no. 2 low pressure below alarm limit
A
1)
03)
21:10 COOL DX, compressor no. 2 high pressure sensor defective
A
1)
03)
21:11 COOL DX, compressor no. 2 high pressure above alarm limit
A1)
03)
21:12 COOL DX, compressor no. 2 monitoring tripped
A
03)
21:13 COOL DX, compressor no. 2 restart error
A
03)
21:14 COOL DX, outdoor air temperature sensor defective
B
03)
21:15 COOL DX, phase monitoring error
A
03)
23:1
SMART Link, communication error
A
03)
23:2
SMART Link, alarm level 1 tripped
B
03)
23:3
SMART Link, alarm level 2 tripped
B
03)
23:4
SMART Link, alarm level 3 tripped
B
03)
23:10 AQUA Link, I/O module no. 5 tripped
B
03)
23:11 AQUA Link, pump monitoring tripped
B
03)
24:1
SMART Link, no. 1 communication error
A
03)
24:2
SMART Link, no. 1 alarm tripped
A
03)
24:4
SMART Link, no. 2 communication error
A
03)
24:5
SMART Link, no. 2 alarm tripped
A
03)
24:7
SMART Link, no. 3 communication error
A
03)
24:8
SMART Link, no. 3 alarm tripped
A
03)
24:10 SMART Link, no. 4 communication error
A
03)
24:11 SMART Link, no. 4 alarm tripped
A
03)
26:1
Pre-filter, supply air pressure sensor no. 8 communication error
B
03)
26:2
pre-filter, supply air fouled
B
03)
26:7
Pre-filter, extract air pressure sensor no. 9 communication error
B
03)
26:8
Pre-filter, extract air fouled
B
03)
27:1
AHU filter, supply air pressure sensor no. 3/4 communication error
B
03)
27:2
AHU filter, supply air fouled
B
03)
27:7
AHU filter, extract air pressure sensor no. 3/4 communication error
B
03)
27:8
AHU filter, extract air fouled
B
03)
28:1
Final filter, supply air pressure sensor no. A communication error
B
03)
28:2
Final filter, supply air fouled
B
03)
30:1
Flow measurement, supply air pressure sensor no. 1/2 communication error
A
13)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
A = A alarm
Effect
B = B alarm
18:3
18:12 AYC cooling, temperature below set point alarm limit
Adjusted value
Priority
www.swegon.com
153
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Alarm No.
Factory-preset valuee
Priority
Function
0 = Blocked
A = alarm A
Effect
0 = In oper. 0 = Blocked
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
Flow measurement, supply airflow below set point alarm limit
B
03)
30:3
Flow measurement, supply air flow above set point alarm limit
B
03)
30:6
Flow measurement, extract air pressure sensor no. 1/2 communication error
A
13)
30:7
Flow measurement, extract airflow below set point alarm limit
B
03)
30:8
Flow measurement, extract airflow below set point alarm limit
B
03)
30:11 Flow measurement, purging pressure sensor no. B communication error
B
03)
31:1
Pressure regulation, supply air pressure sensor no. 5 communication error
A
13)
31:2
Pressure regulation, supply air pressure below set point alarm limit
B
03)
31:3
Pressure regulation, supply air pressure above set point alarm limit
B
03)
31:6
Pressure regulation, extract air pressure sensor no. 6 kommunikationsfel
A
13)
31:7
Pressure regulation, extract air pressure below set point alarm limit
B
03)
31:8
Pressure regulation, extract air pressure above set point alarm limit
B
03)
32:1
RECO2, I/O module no. 0 communication error
A
03)
32:2
RECO2, pressure sensor no. 0 communication error
A
03)
32:3
RECO2, recirculated air damper monitoring tripped
B
03)
32:4
RECO2, outdoor air damper monitoring tripped
B
03)
33:1
Period between servicing past alarm limit
B
03)
33:15 Lock function tripped
A
1
34:1
External control, I/O module no. 3 communication error
B
03)
34:2
External control, I/O module no. 6 kommunikationsfel
B
03)
35:1
Booster air terminal, I/O module no. 8 communication error
B
0
38:1
MIRU Control no. 1 communication error
A
03)
38:2
MIRU Control no. 1 motor controller alarm tripped
A
03)
38:3
MIRU Control no. 1 motor controller communication error
A
03)
38:4
MIRU Control no. 1 flow measurement pressure sensor no. 0 communication error
A
03)
38:5
MIRU Control no. 1 pressure regulation sensor no. 1 communication error
A
03)
38:6
MIRU Control no. 1 temperature sensor defective
B
03)
38:7
MIRU Control no. 1 flow/pressure deviation from set point alarm limit
B
03)
39:1
MIRU Control no. 2 communication error
A
03)
39:2
MIRU Control no. 2 motor controller alarm tripped
A
03)
39:3
MIRU Control no. 2 motor controller communication error
A
03)
39:4
A
03)
39:5
MIRU Control no. 2 flow measurement pressure sensor no. 0 communication error
MIRU Control no. 2 pressure regulation sensor no. 1 communication error
A
03)
39:6
MIRU Control no. 2 temperature sensor defective
B
03)
39:7
MIRU Control no. 2 flow/pressure deviation from set point alarm limit
B
03)
40:1
MIRU Control no. 3 communication error
A
03)
40:2
MIRU Control no. 3 motor controller alarm tripped
A
03)
40:3
MIRU Control no. 3 motor controller communication error
A
03)
40:4
MIRU Control no. 3 flow measurement pressure sensor no. 0 communication error
A
03)
40:5
MIRU Control no. 3 pressure regulation sensor no. 1 communication error
A
03)
40:6
MIRU Control no. 3 temperature sensor defective
B
03)
40:7
MIRU Control no. 3 flow/pressure deviation from set point alarm limit
B
03)
41:1
MIRU Control no. 4 communication error
A
03)
41:2
MIRU Control no. 4 motor controller alarm tripped
A
03)
41:3
MIRU Control no. 4 motor controller communication error
A
03)
41:4
MIRU Control no. 4 flow measurement pressure sensor no. 0 communication error
A
03)
154
www.swegon.com
A = A alarm
Effect
0 = In oper.
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
30:2
2)
Adjusted value
Priority
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Factory-preset valuee
Priority
Function
0 = Blocked
A = alarm A
Effect
0 = In oper. 0 = Blocked
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
A = A alarm
Effect
0 = In oper.
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
41:5
MIRU Control no. 4 pressure regulation sensor no. 1 communication error
A
03)
41:6
MIRU Control no. 4 temperature sensor defective
B
03)
41:7
MIRU Control no. 4 flow/pressure deviation from set point alarm limit
B
03)
42:1
MIRU Control no. 5 communication error
A
03)
42:2
MIRU Control no. 5 motor controller alarm tripped
A
03)
42:3
MIRU Control no. 5 motor controller communication error
A
03)
42:4
MIRU Control no. 5 flow measurement pressure sensor no. 0 communication error
A
03)
42:5
MIRU Control no. 5 pressure regulation sensor no. 1 communication error
A
03)
42:6
MIRU Control no. 5 temperature sensor defective
B
03)
42:7
MIRU Control no. 5 flow/pressure deviation from set point alarm limit
B
03)
43:1
MIRU Control no. 6 communication error
A
03)
43:2
MIRU Control no. 6 motor controller alarm tripped
A
03)
43:3
MIRU Control no. 6 motor controller communication error
A
03)
43:4
MIRU Control no. 6 flow measurement pressure sensor no. 0 communication error
A
03)
43:5
MIRU Control no. 6 pressure regulation sensor no. 1 communication error
A
03)
43:6
MIRU Control no. 6 temperature sensor defective
B
03)
43:7
MIRU Control no. 6 flow/pressure deviation from set point alarm limit
B
03)
44:1
MIRU Control no. 7 communication error
A
03)
44:2
MIRU Control no. 7 motor controller alarm tripped
A
03)
44:3
MIRU Control no. 7 motor controller communication error
A
03)
44:4
MIRU Control no. 7 flow measurement pressure sensor no. 0 communication error
A
03)
44:5
MIRU Control no. 7 pressure regulation sensor no. 1 communication error
A
03)
44:6
MIRU Control no. 7 temperature sensor defective
B
03)
44:7
MIRU Control no. 7 flow/pressure deviation from set point alarm limit
B
03)
45:1
MIRU Control no. 8 communication error
A
03)
45:2
MIRU Control no. 8 motor controller alarm tripped
A
03)
45:3
MIRU Control no. 8 motor controller communication error
A
03)
45:4
MIRU Control no. 8 flow measurement pressure sensor no. 0 communication error
A
03)
45:5
MIRU Control no. 8 pressure regulation sensor no. 1 communication error
A
03)
45:6
MIRU Control no. 8 temperature sensor defective
B
03)
45:7
MIRU Control no. 8 flow/pressure deviation from set point alarm limit
B
03)
46:1
MIRU Control no. 9 communication error
A
03)
46:2
MIRU Control no. 9 motor controller alarm tripped
A
03)
46:3
MIRU Control no. 9 motor controller communication error
A
03)
46:4
MIRU Control no. 9 flow measurement pressure sensor no. 0 communication error
A
03)
46:5
MIRU Control no. 9 pressure regulation sensor no. 1 communication error
A
03)
46:6
MIRU Control no. 9 temperature sensor defective
B
03)
46:7
MIRU Control no. 9 flow/pressure deviation from set point alarm limit
B
03)
47:1
MIRU Control no. 10 communication error
A
03)
47:2
MIRU Control no. 10 motor controller alarm tripped
A
03)
47:3
MIRU Control no. 10 motor controller communication error
A
03)
47:4
MIRU Control no. 10 flow measurement pressure sensor no. 0 communication error
A
03)
47:5
MIRU Control no. 10 pressure regulation sensor no. 1 communication error
A
03)
47:6
MIRU Control no. 10 temperature sensor defective
B
03)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Adjusted value
Priority
www.swegon.com
155
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Alarm No.
Factory-preset valuee
Priority
Function
0 = Blocked
A = alarm A
Effect
0 = In oper. 0 = Blocked
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
MIRU Control no. 10 flow/pressure deviation from set point alarm limit
B
03)
49:1
Supply air fan no. 1A communication error
A
13)
49:2
Supply air fan no. 1A motor controller overcurrent
A1)
13)
49:3
Supply air fan no. 1A motor controller undervoltage
A1)
13)
49:4
Supply air fan no. 1A motor controller overvoltage
A1)
13)
49:5
Supply air fan no. 1A motor controller excess temperature
A
1)
13)
49:6
Supply air fan no. 1A motor controller start up error
A
1)
13)
49:7
Supply air fan no. 1A motor controller uneven phase voltage
A
1)
13)
49:8
Supply air fan no. 1A motor controller phase error
A
1)
13)
49:9
Supply air fan no. 1A motor controller internal memory error
A
1)
13)
B
50:1
Supply air fan no. 2A communication error
A
50:2
Supply air fan no. 2A motor controller overcurrent
50:3
13)
Supply air fan no. 2A motor controller undervoltage
A
1)
13)
50:4
Supply air fan no. 2A motor controller overvoltage
A
1)
13)
50:5
Supply air fan no. 2A motor controller excess temperature
A
1)
13)
50:6
Supply air fan no. 2A motor controller start up error
A
1)
13)
50:7
Supply air fan no. 2A motor controller uneven phase voltage
A
1)
13)
50:8
Supply air fan no. 2A motor controller phase error
A
1)
13)
50:9
Supply air fan no. 2A motor controller internal memory error
A1)
13)
50:10 Supply air fan no. 2A motor controller current limitation
B
03)
51:1
Supply air fan no. 3A communication error
A
13)
51:2
Supply air fan no. 3A motor controller overcurrent
A1)
13)
51:3
Supply air fan no. 3A motor controller undervoltage
A1)
13)
51:4
Supply air fan no. 3A motor controller overvoltage
A1)
13)
51:5
Supply air fan no. 3A motor controller excess temperature
A1)
13)
51:6
Supply air fan no. 3A motor controller start up error
A
1)
13)
51:7
Supply air fan no. 3A motor controller uneven phase voltage
A
1)
13)
51:8
Supply air fan no. 3A motor controller phase error
A
1)
13)
51:9
Supply air fan no. 3A motor controller internal memory error
A
1)
13)
52:1
Supply air fan no. 1B communication error
A
52:2
Supply air fan no. 1B motor controller overcurrent
52:3
03)
13)
A
1)
13)
Supply air fan no. 1B motor controller undervoltage
A
1)
13)
52:4
Supply air fan no. 1B motor controller overvoltage
A
1)
13)
52:5
Supply air fan no. 1B motor controller excess temperature
A
1)
13)
52:6
Supply air fan no. 1B motor controller start up error
A
1)
13)
52:7
Supply air fan no. 1B motor controller uneven phase voltage
A
1)
13)
52:8
Supply air fan no. 1B motor controller phase error
A
1)
13)
52:9
Supply air fan no. 1B motor controller internal memory error
A
1)
13)
52:10 Supply air fan no. 1B motor controller current limitation
B
03)
53:1
Supply air fan no. 2B communication error
A
13)
53:2
Supply air fan no. 2B motor controller overcurrent
A1)
13)
53:3
Supply air fan no. 2B motor controller undervoltage
A1)
13)
53:4
Supply air fan no. 2B motor controller overvoltage
A1)
13)
53:5
Supply air fan no. 2B motor controller excess temperature
A1)
13)
53:6
Supply air fan no. 2B motor controller start up error
A1)
13)
53:7
Supply air fan no. 2B motor controller uneven phase voltage
A
13)
156
www.swegon.com
1 = Stop
13)
A
B
0 = In oper.
03)
1)
51:10 Supply air fan no. 3A motor controller current limitation
A = A alarm
Effect
B = B alarm
47:7
49:10 Supply air fan no. 1A motor controller current limitation
Adjusted value
Priority
1)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Alarm No.
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Factory-preset valuee
Priority
Function
0 = Blocked
A = alarm A
Effect
0 = In oper. 0 = Blocked
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
53:8
Supply air fan no. 2B motor controller phase error
53:9
Supply air fan no. 2B motor controller internal memory error
A1)
A1)
13)
03)
54:1
Supply air fan no. 3B communication error
A
13)
54:2
Supply air fan no. 3B motor controller overcurrent
A1)
13)
54:3
Supply air fan no. 3B motor controller undervoltage
A
1)
13)
54:4
Supply air fan no. 3B motor controller overvoltage
A
1)
13)
54:5
Supply air fan no. 3B motor controller excess temperature
A
1)
13)
54:6
Supply air fan no. 3B motor controller start up error
A
1)
13)
54:7
Supply air fan no. 3B motor controller uneven phase voltage
A
1)
13)
54:8
Supply air fan no. 3B motor controller phase error
A
1)
13)
54:9
Supply air fan no. 3B motor controller internal memory error
A
1)
13)
55:1
Extract air fan no. 1A communication error
A
55:2
Extract air fan no. 1A motor controller overcurrent
55:3
13)
A
13)
Extract air fan no. 1A motor controller undervoltage
A
1)
13)
55:4
Extract air fan no. 1A motor controller overvoltage
A
1)
13)
55:5
Extract air fan no. 1A motor controller excess temperature
A
1)
13)
55:6
Extract air fan no. 1A motor controller start up error
A
1)
13)
55:7
Extract air fan no. 1A motor controller uneven phase voltage
A1)
13)
55:8
Extract air fan no. 1A motor controller phase error
A1)
13)
55:9
Extract air fan no. 1A motor controller internal memory error
A1)
13)
55:10 Extract air fan no. 1A motor controller current limitation
B
03)
56:1
Extract air fan no. 2A communication error
A
13)
56:2
Extract air fan no. 2A motor controller overcurrent
A1)
13)
56:3
Extract air fan no. 2A motor controller undervoltage
A1)
13)
56:4
Extract air fan no. 2A motor controller overvoltage
A
1)
13)
56:5
Extract air fan no. 2A motor controller excess temperature
A
1)
13)
56:6
Extract air fan no. 2A motor controller start up error
A
1)
13)
56:7
Extract air fan no. 2A motor controller uneven phase voltage
A
1)
13)
56:8
Extract air fan no. 2A motor controller phase error
A
1)
13)
56:9
Extract air fan no. 2A motor controller internal memory error
A
1)
13)
B
57:1
Extract air fan no. 3A communication error
A
57:2
Extract air fan no. 3A motor controller overcurrent
57:3
03)
13)
A
1)
13)
Extract air fan no. 3A motor controller undervoltage
A
1)
13)
57:4
Extract air fan no. 3A motor controller overvoltage
A
1)
13)
57:5
Extract air fan no. 3A motor controller excess temperature
A
1)
13)
57:6
Extract air fan no. 3A motor controller start up error
A
1)
13)
57:7
Extract air fan no. 3A motor controller uneven phase voltage
A
1)
13)
57:8
Extract air fan no. 3A motor controller phase error
A1)
13)
57:9
Extract air fan no. 3A motor controller internal memory error
A1)
13)
57:10 Extract air fan no. 3A motor controller current limitation
B
03)
58:1
Extract air fan no. 1B communication error
A
13)
58:2
Extract air fan no. 1B motor controller overcurrent
A1)
13)
58:3
Extract air fan no. 1B motor controller undervoltage
A1)
13)
58:4
Extract air fan no. 1B motor controller overvoltage
A1)
13)
58:5
Extract air fan no. 1B motor controller excess temperature
A
1)
13)
58:6
Extract air fan no. 1B motor controller start up error
A
1)
13)
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
1 = Stop
03)
1)
56:10 Extract air fan no. 2A motor controller current limitation
0 = In oper.
B = B alarm
B
B
A = A alarm
Effect
13)
53:10 Supply air fan no. 2B motor controller current limitation
54:10 Supply air fan no. 3B motor controller current limitation
Adjusted value
Priority
www.swegon.com
157
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
Alarm No.
Factory-preset valuee
Priority
Function
0 = Blocked
A = alarm A
Effect
0 = In oper. 0 = Blocked
1 = Stop
B = B alarm
Extract air fan no. 1B motor controller uneven phase voltage
A1)
13)
58:8
Extract air fan no. 1B motor controller phase error
A1)
13)
58:9
Extract air fan no. 1B motor controller internal memory error
A1)
13)
58:10 Extract air fan no. 1B motor controller current limitation
B
03)
59:1
Extract air fan no. 2B communication error
A
59:2
Extract air fan no. 2B motor controller overcurrent
59:3
A
13)
Extract air fan no. 2B motor controller undervoltage
A
1)
13)
59:4
Extract air fan no. 2B motor controller overvoltage
A
1)
13)
59:5
Extract air fan no. 2B motor controller excess temperature
A
1)
13)
59:6
Extract air fan no. 2B motor controller start up error
A
1)
13)
59:7
Extract air fan no. 2B motor controller uneven phase voltage
A
1)
13)
59:8
Extract air fan no. 2B motor controller phase error
A
1)
13)
59:9
Extract air fan no. 2B motor controller internal memory error
A
1)
13)
60:1
Extract air fan no. 3B communication error
A
60:2
Extract air fan no. 3B motor controller overcurrent
60:3
1 = Stop
03)
13)
A
1)
13)
Extract air fan no. 3B motor controller undervoltage
A
1)
13)
60:4
Extract air fan no. 3B motor controller overvoltage
A
1)
13)
60:5
Extract air fan no. 3B motor controller excess temperature
A
1)
13)
60:6
Extract air fan no. 3B motor controller start up error
A1)
13)
60:7
Extract air fan no. 3B motor controller uneven phase voltage
A1)
13)
60:8
Extract air fan no. 3B motor controller phase error
A1)
13)
60:9
Extract air fan no. 3B motor controller internal memory error
A1)
13)
B
03)
60:10 Extract air fan no. 3B motor controller current limitation
0 = In oper.
13)
1)
B
A = A alarm
Effect
B = B alarm
58:7
59:10 Extract air fan no. 2B motor controller current limitation
Adjusted value
Priority
Cannot be blocked.
The delay is adjustable.
3)
Adjustable.
4)
Stops the AHU if the temperature is below the adjustable limit.
5)
Inactive as factory setting.
1)
2)
Commissioning performed by:
Date
Company
Name
158
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
GOLD/
SILVER C
Version E
RX
PX
CX
SD
GOLD
LP
COMPACT
Type
Impeller
type
ebm-papst
ebm-papst
Stål
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
02
03
05
08
04
05
07
08
11
12
04
05 (Eff.var 1)
05 (Eff.var 2)
07 (Eff.var 1)
07 (Eff.var 2)
08 (Eff.var 1)
08 (Eff.var 2)
11 (Eff.var 1)
11 (Eff.var 2)
12 (Eff.var 1)
12 (Eff.var 2)
14 (Eff.var 1)
14 (Eff.var 2)
20 (Eff.var 1)
20 (Eff.var 2)
25 (Eff.var 1)
25 (Eff.var 2)
50 (Eff.var 1)
50 (Eff.var 2)
30 (Eff.var 1)
35 (Eff.var 1)
60 (Eff.var 1)
70 (Eff.var 1)
30 (Eff.var 2)
35 (Eff.var 2)
60 (Eff.var 2)
70 (Eff.var 2)
40-1
40-2
80 (Eff.var 1)
100 (Eff.var 1)
120 (Eff.var 1)
80 (Eff.var 2)
100 (Eff.var 2)
120 (Eff.var 2)
2013-09-19
Size
AHU data
Fan data
Impeller
Motor
diameter
manufacture
mm
250
ebm-papst
250
ebm-papst
250
ebm-papst
288
ebm-papst
288
Domel
288
Domel
288
Domel
348
Domel
348
Domel
422
Domel
288
Domel
288
Domel
288
Domel
288
Domel
288
Domel
348
Domel
348
Domel
348
Domel
348
Domel
422
Domel
422
Domel
422
Domel
422
Domel
510
Domel
510
Domel
510
Domel
510
Domel
510
Domel
510
Domel
616
Domel
616
Domel
Domel
616
616
Domel
616
Domel
616
Domel
616
Domel
616
Domel
744
Domel
744
Domel
744
Domel
744
Domel
744
Domel
744
Domel
744
Domel
744
Domel
0,38
0,68
0,9
0,41
0,8
0,8
1,15
1,15
1,6
0,41
0,8
1,15
0,8
1,15
1,15
1,6
1,15
1,6
1,6
2,4
1,6
2,4
2,4
3,4
2,4
3,4
2,4
3,4
4,0
4,0
4,0
4,0
5,0
5,0
6,5
6,5
3,9
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
10
10
10
kW
Motor power
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Installation
category
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Static
Efficiency
category
Vaiable
speed
drive
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1,00
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
1,01
Specific
ratio
Actual
49,9
51,0
59,3
65,8
64,8
65,5
63,8
65,4
65,4
66,8
64,8
65,5
63,5
65,5
63,5
65,4
67,4
65,4
67,4
66,8
66,0
66,8
66,0
66,7
65,7
66,7
65,7
66,7
65,7
65,2
65,2
65,2
65,2
67,2
67,2
67,4
67,4
70,5
69,2
69,2
69,2
69,2
68,5
68,5
68,5
Req 2013
41,5
42,9
45,7
47,0
44,1
47,1
47,1
48,6
48,6
49,8
44,1
47,1
48,1
47,1
48,1
48,6
49,7
48,6
49,7
49,8
51,3
49,8
51,3
51,9
53,1
51,9
53,1
51,9
53,1
54,5
54,5
54,5
54,5
55,0
55,0
56,2
56,2
54,0
56,2
56,2
56,2
56,2
58,0
58,0
58,0
Req 2015
45,5
46,9
49,7
51,0
48,1
51,1
51,1
52,6
52,6
53,8
48,1
51,1
52,1
51,1
52,1
52,6
53,7
52,6
53,7
53,8
55,3
53,8
55,3
55,9
57,1
55,9
57,1
55,9
57,1
58,5
58,5
58,5
58,5
59,0
59,0
60,2
60,2
58,0
60,2
60,2
60,2
60,2
62,0
62,0
62,0
Overall efficiency ηe(s)
Actual
66,5
66,2
71,6
76,8
78,7
76,4
74,7
74,8
74,8
75,0
78,7
76,4
73,4
76,4
73,4
74,8
75,7
74,8
75,7
75,0
72,7
75,0
72,7
72,8
70,5
72,8
70,5
72,8
70,5
68,8
68,8
68,8
68,8
70,2
70,2
69,2
69,2
74,5
70,9
70,9
70,9
70,9
68,5
68,5
68,5
Req 2013
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
Efficiency grade N
Req 2015
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
Data according to ErP directive in technical documentation and free access webpage
Air Handling Units (including GOLD-E), EU regulation 327/2011 fan data, Technical documentation data
Datum:
Power
input Ped
kW
0,268
0,361
0,670
0,901
0,476
0,909
0,920
1,27
1,27
1,66
0,476
0,909
1,150
0,909
1,15
1,27
1,62
1,27
1,62
1,66
2,30
1,66
2,30
2,62
3,44
2,62
3,44
2,62
3,44
4,62
4,62
4,62
4,62
5,19
5,19
6,77
6,77
4,200
6,76
6,76
6,76
6,76
10,70
10,70
10,70
Air Flow
qv
m³/s
0,290
0,323
0,435
0,577
0,519
0,649
0,649
0,923
0,923
1,26
0,519
0,649
0,734
0,649
0,734
0,923
1,00
0,923
1,00
1,26
1,48
1,26
1,48
2,18
2,44
2,18
2,44
2,18
2,44
2,93
2,93
2,93
2,93
3,26
3,26
3,56
3,56
4,240
4,95
4,95
4,95
4,95
5,18
5,18
5,18
Pressure
increase pfs
Pa
410
510
830
941
536
840
829
835
835
821
536
840
924
840
924
835
1009
835
1009
821
965
821
965
759
890
759
890
759
890
988
988
988
988
1023
1023
1228
1228
668
911
911
911
911
1358
1358
1358
minˉ¹
2690
3000
3845
3415
2700
3380
3380
2780
2780
2250
2700
3380
3700
3380
3700
2780
3050
2780
3050
2250
2500
2250
2500
1890
2100
1890
2100
1890
2100
1635
1635
1635
1635
1740
1740
1900
1900
1180
1380
1380
1380
1380
1590
1590
1590
Speed n
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
11.3 Ecodesign data
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
www.swegon.com
159
GB.GOLDSKE.140919
11.4 Building Materials
Declaration
For a complete Declaration of Construction Materials, see our
home page at www.swegon.com under Products & Services.
11.5 License
Copyright 2013-2014 Swegon AB
All right reserved.
Parts of this work is subject to GNU General Public License v2.0
and other Free/Libre Open Source Software licenses.
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of
the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more
details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.
org/licenses/>.
For full licensing conditions and the Free/Libre Open Source
Software components, please visit:
http://ftp.swegon.se/opensource/opensource/
All documentation is available in digital form and can be downloaded from
www.swegon.com
160
www.swegon.com
We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement